Automatic date update in version.in
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
219d1afa 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
219d1afa 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
219d1afa 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559machine specific performance.
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
252b5132
RH
762@end itemize
763
764@kindex -n
765@cindex read-only text
766@cindex NMAGIC
767@kindex --nmagic
768@item -n
769@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
770Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
771libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
772mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
773
774@kindex -N
775@kindex --omagic
776@cindex read/write from cmd line
777@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 778@item -N
252b5132
RH
779@itemx --omagic
780Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
781not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
782libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
783mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
784is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
785specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
786
787@kindex --no-omagic
788@cindex OMAGIC
789@item --no-omagic
790This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
791sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
792be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
793shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
794
795@kindex -o @var{output}
796@kindex --output=@var{output}
797@cindex naming the output file
798@item -o @var{output}
799@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 800Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
801option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
802script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
803
804@kindex -O @var{level}
805@cindex generating optimized output
806@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 807If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 808the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
809should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
810option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
811the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
812no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
813of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 814
387dd777
DP
815@kindex -plugin @var{name}
816@item -plugin @var{name}
817Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
818the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
819automatically added by the complier, when using link time
820optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
821wish.
822
823Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
824from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
825@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
826those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
827copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
828based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 829just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 856@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
857Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
858flags governing input file handling.
859
a712da20
NC
860@kindex -q
861@kindex --emit-relocs
862@cindex retain relocations in final executable
863@item -q
864@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 865Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
866Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
867order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
868in larger executables.
869
dbab7a7b
NC
870This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
871
4f471f39
RS
872@kindex --force-dynamic
873@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
874@item --force-dynamic
875Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
876to VxWorks targets.
877
252b5132
RH
878@cindex partial link
879@cindex relocatable output
880@kindex -r
1049f94e 881@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 882@item -r
1049f94e 883@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 884Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 885turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
886linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
887magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
888@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 889@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
890If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
891linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
892constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
893
62bf86b4
HPN
894When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
895partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
896relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
897example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
898with input files in other formats at all.
899
252b5132
RH
900This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
901
902@kindex -R @var{file}
903@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
904@cindex symbol-only input
905@item -R @var{filename}
906@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
907Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
908relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
909to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
910programs. You may use this option more than once.
911
ff5dcc92 912For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 913followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 914the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
915
916@kindex -s
917@kindex --strip-all
918@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 919@item -s
252b5132
RH
920@itemx --strip-all
921Omit all symbol information from the output file.
922
923@kindex -S
924@kindex --strip-debug
925@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 926@item -S
252b5132
RH
927@itemx --strip-debug
928Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
929
a70f34c0
NC
930@kindex --strip-discarded
931@kindex --no-strip-discarded
932@item --strip-discarded
933@itemx --no-strip-discarded
934Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
935Enabled by default.
936
252b5132
RH
937@kindex -t
938@kindex --trace
939@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 940@item -t
252b5132 941@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 942Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
943
944@kindex -T @var{script}
945@kindex --script=@var{script}
946@cindex script files
947@item -T @var{scriptfile}
948@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
949Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 950@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 951@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
952output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
953the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
954specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
955options accumulate.
252b5132 956
14be8564
L
957@kindex -dT @var{script}
958@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
959@cindex script files
960@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
961@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
962Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
963
964This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
965processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
966command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
967@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
968behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
969command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
970the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
971@samp{gcc}).
972
252b5132
RH
973@kindex -u @var{symbol}
974@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
975@cindex undefined symbol
976@item -u @var{symbol}
977@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
978Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
979symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
980modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
981different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
982option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
983
0a618243
AB
984If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
985into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
986undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
987instead.
988
989@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
990@cindex symbols, require defined
991@cindex defined symbol
992@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
993Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
994is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
995is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
996and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
997@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
998can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
999
252b5132
RH
1000@kindex -Ur
1001@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1002@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1003For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1004@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1005turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1006@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1007It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1008with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1009be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1010@samp{-r} for the others.
1011
c005eb9e
AB
1012@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1013@cindex orphan sections
1014@cindex sections, orphan
1015@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1016Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1017specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1018
1019@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1020
1021@table @code
1022@item place
1023Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1024the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1025@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1026
1027@item discard
1028All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1029@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1030
1031@item warn
1032The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1033issue a warning.
1034
1035@item error
1036The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1037@end table
1038
1039The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1040
577a0623
AM
1041@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1043Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1044@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1045missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1046specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1047multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1048input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1049in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1050
252b5132
RH
1051@kindex -v
1052@kindex -V
1053@kindex --version
1054@cindex version
1055@item -v
1056@itemx --version
1057@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1058Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1059lists the supported emulations.
1060
1061@kindex -x
1062@kindex --discard-all
1063@cindex deleting local symbols
1064@item -x
1065@itemx --discard-all
1066Delete all local symbols.
1067
1068@kindex -X
1069@kindex --discard-locals
1070@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1071@item -X
252b5132 1072@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1073Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1074system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1075or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1076
1077@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1078@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1079@cindex symbol tracing
1080@item -y @var{symbol}
1081@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1082Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1083option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1084to prepend an underscore.
1085
1086This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1087don't know where the reference is coming from.
1088
1089@kindex -Y @var{path}
1090@item -Y @var{path}
1091Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1092for Solaris compatibility.
1093
1094@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1095@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1096The recognized keywords are:
1097@table @samp
1098
e6e2dfbd
AM
1099@item bndplt
1100Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1101
1102@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1103@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1104@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1105@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1106Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1107to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1108@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1109@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1110@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1111@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1112Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1113
cd6d6c15 1114@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1115@itemx nocombreloc
1116Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1117dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1118
b8871f35 1119@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1120@itemx nocommon
1121Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1122link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1123
1124@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1125Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1126layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1127using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1128
cd6d6c15 1129@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1130Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1131is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1132This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1135@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1136Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1137if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1138by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1139@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1140may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1141selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1142these options.
1143
6aa29e7b
JJ
1144@item execstack
1145Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1146
b039ef04
L
1147@item global
1148This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1149the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1150of subsequently loaded libraries.
1151
93ab9c0d
NC
1152@item globalaudit
1153This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1154This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1155setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1156tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1157the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1158all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1159
e6e2dfbd
AM
1160@item ibtplt
1161Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
8df93cb5 1164@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1166to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1167Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1168
cd6d6c15
NC
1169@item initfirst
1170This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1171It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1172before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1173the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1174the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1175objects.
1176
1177@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1178Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1179so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1180libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1181
5fa222e4
AM
1182@item lazy
1183When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1184dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1185the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1186Lazy binding is the default.
1187
cd6d6c15 1188@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1189Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1190
e6e2dfbd
AM
1191@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1193
e6e2dfbd
AM
1194@item muldefs
1195Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1196
cd6d6c15 1197@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1198Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1199defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1200
1201@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1202Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1203should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1204
1205@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1206Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1207
1208@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1209Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1210
1211@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1212Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1213
6aa29e7b
JJ
1214@item noexecstack
1215Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1216
e6e2dfbd
AM
1217@item noextern-protected-data
1218Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1219library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1220used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1221generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1222module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1223i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1224
e6e2dfbd
AM
1225@item noreloc-overflow
1226Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1227relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1228overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1229
cd6d6c15
NC
1230@item now
1231When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1232dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1233when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1234function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1235called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1236
1237@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1238Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1239
6aa29e7b 1240@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1241@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1242Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1243specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1244relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1245than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1246Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1247
47acac12
L
1248@item separate-code
1249@itemx noseparate-code
1250Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1251specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1252be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1253code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1254
e6e2dfbd
AM
1255@item shstk
1256Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1257to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1258Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1259
04c3a755 1260@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1261Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1262Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1263@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1264
e6e2dfbd
AM
1265@item text
1266@itemx notext
1267@itemx textoff
1268Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1269relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1270@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1271
97a232d7
NC
1272@item undefs
1273Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1274either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1275This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1276
cd6d6c15
NC
1277@end table
1278
ece2d90e 1279Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1280
1281@kindex -(
1282@cindex groups of archives
1283@item -( @var{archives} -)
1284@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1285The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1286either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1287
1288The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1289references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1290the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1291archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1292object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1293would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1294they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1295resolved.
1296
1297Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1298it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1299more archives.
1300
69da35b5
NC
1301@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1302@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1303@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1304@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1305Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1306recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1307and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1308the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1309behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1310so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1311restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1312
4a43e768
AM
1313@kindex --as-needed
1314@kindex --no-as-needed
1315@item --as-needed
1316@itemx --no-as-needed
1317This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1318on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1319the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1320on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1321needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1322emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1323non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1324the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1325non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1326Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1327the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1328needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1329from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1330
e56f61be
L
1331@kindex --add-needed
1332@kindex --no-add-needed
1333@item --add-needed
1334@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1335These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1336their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1337options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1338and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1339
252b5132
RH
1340@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1341@item -assert @var{keyword}
1342This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1343
1344@kindex -Bdynamic
1345@kindex -dy
1346@kindex -call_shared
1347@item -Bdynamic
1348@itemx -dy
1349@itemx -call_shared
1350Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1351for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1352default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1353for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1354multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1355@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1356
a1ab1d2a
UD
1357@kindex -Bgroup
1358@item -Bgroup
1359Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1360section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1361object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1362@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1363only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1364
252b5132
RH
1365@kindex -Bstatic
1366@kindex -dn
1367@kindex -non_shared
1368@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1369@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1370@itemx -dn
1371@itemx -non_shared
1372@itemx -static
1373Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1374platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1375variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1376may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1377library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1378option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1379option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1380shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1381references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1382libraries.
252b5132
RH
1383
1384@kindex -Bsymbolic
1385@item -Bsymbolic
1386When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1387definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1388for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1389within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1390@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1391executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1392the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1393support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1394
40b36307
L
1395@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1396@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1397When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1398symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1399This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1400when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1401to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1402This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1403libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1404
55255dae
L
1405@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1407Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1408typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1409global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1410within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1411to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1412in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1413which support shared libraries.
1414
1415The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1416scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1417
40b36307
L
1418@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1419@item --dynamic-list-data
1420Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1421
1422@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1424Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1425is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1426
0b8a70d9
L
1427@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1429Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1430
252b5132
RH
1431@kindex --check-sections
1432@kindex --no-check-sections
1433@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1434@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1435Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1436been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1437perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1438suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1439allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1440restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1441Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1442force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1443option.
252b5132 1444
ddbb8a31
NC
1445@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1446@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1447@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1448@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1449This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1450by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1451command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1452output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1453input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1454specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1455follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1456behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1457
1458This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1459libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1460mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1461their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1462required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1463the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1464dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1465symbols.
1466
252b5132
RH
1467@cindex cross reference table
1468@kindex --cref
1469@item --cref
1470Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1471generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1472Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1473
1474The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1475easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1476sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1477symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1478definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1479where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1480symbol are listed.
252b5132 1481
4818e05f
AM
1482@cindex common allocation
1483@kindex --no-define-common
1484@item --no-define-common
1485This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1486The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1487@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1488
1489The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1490the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1491of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1492forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1493Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1494from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1495This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1496and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1497duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1498paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1499
7bdf4127
AB
1500@cindex group allocation in linker script
1501@cindex section groups
1502@cindex COMDAT
1503@kindex --force-group-allocation
1504@item --force-group-allocation
1505This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1506normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1507default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1508change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1509command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1510effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1511
252b5132 1512@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1513@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1514@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1515Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1516address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1517times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1518limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1519context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1520symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1521constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1522using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1523@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1524equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1525
1526@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1527@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1528@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1529@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1530@itemx --no-demangle
1531These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1532and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1533present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1534underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1535mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1536different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1537to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1538demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1539is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1540
1541@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1542@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1543@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1544@item -I@var{file}
1545@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1546Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1547generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1548linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1549doing.
1550
9b8b325a
RF
1551@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1552@item --no-dynamic-linker
1553When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1554linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1555executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1556entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1557
a70f34c0
NC
1558@kindex --embedded-relocs
1559@item --embedded-relocs
1560This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1561that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1562is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1563targets.
1564
3f0a5f17
ME
1565@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1567Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1568in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1569
7ce691ae 1570@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1571@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1572@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1573@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1574Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1575with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1576
252b5132
RH
1577@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1578@item --force-exe-suffix
1579Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1580
1581If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1582@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1583the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1584option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1585Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1586it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1587
1588@kindex --gc-sections
1589@kindex --no-gc-sections
1590@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1591@item --gc-sections
1592@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1593Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1594targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1595performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1596@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1597collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1598implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1599
d5465ba2
AM
1600@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1601examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1602symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1603command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1604referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1605libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1606referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1607the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1608relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1609@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1610
ac69cbc6 1611This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1612@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1613specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1614@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1615command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1616
c17d87de
NC
1617@kindex --print-gc-sections
1618@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1619@cindex garbage collection
1620@item --print-gc-sections
1621@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1622List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1623printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1624collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1625default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1626be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1627line.
1628
22185505 1629@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1630@cindex garbage collection
1631@item --gc-keep-exported
1632When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1633collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1634default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1635executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1636collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1637Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1638it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1639ELF format targets.
1640
30824704
RM
1641@kindex --print-output-format
1642@cindex output format
1643@item --print-output-format
1644Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1645other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1646in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1647
3604cb1f
TG
1648@kindex --print-memory-usage
1649@cindex memory usage
1650@item --print-memory-usage
1651Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1652the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1653quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1654headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1655parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1656
1657@smallexample
1658Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1659 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1660 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1661@end smallexample
1662
252b5132
RH
1663@cindex help
1664@cindex usage
1665@kindex --help
1666@item --help
1667Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1668
ea20a7da
CC
1669@kindex --target-help
1670@item --target-help
1671Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1672
2509a395
SL
1673@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1674@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1675Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1676@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1677
1678@cindex memory usage
1679@kindex --no-keep-memory
1680@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1681@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1682symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1683instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1684necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1685while linking a large executable.
1686
1687@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1688@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1689@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1690@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1691@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1692Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1693is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1694The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1695behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1696libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1697
97a232d7
NC
1698The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1699
aa713662
L
1700@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1701@kindex -z muldefs
1702@item --allow-multiple-definition
1703@itemx -z muldefs
1704Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1705report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1706first definition will be used.
1707
b79e8c78 1708@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1709@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1710@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1711@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1712Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1713This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1714determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1715shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1716how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1717
903249d7
NC
1718The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1719referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1720an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1721a shared library.
1722
1723The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1724libraries specified at link time are that:
1725
1726@itemize @bullet
1727@item
1728A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1729that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1730resolvable at load time.
1731@item
1732There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1733symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1734
1735The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1736select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1737architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1738appropriate memset function.
1739@end itemize
b79e8c78 1740
31941635
L
1741@kindex --no-undefined-version
1742@item --no-undefined-version
1743Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1744it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1745will be issued instead.
1746
3e3b46e5
PB
1747@kindex --default-symver
1748@item --default-symver
1749Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1750exported symbols.
1751
1752@kindex --default-imported-symver
1753@item --default-imported-symver
1754Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1755imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1756
252b5132
RH
1757@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1758@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1759Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1760files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1761been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1762This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1763errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1764have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1765inappropriate.
1766
fe7929ce
AM
1767@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1768@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1769Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1770library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1771
252b5132
RH
1772@kindex --no-whole-archive
1773@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1774Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1775archive files.
1776
1777@cindex output file after errors
1778@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1779@item --noinhibit-exec
1780Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1781Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1782errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1783when it issues any error whatsoever.
1784
0a9c1c8e
CD
1785@kindex -nostdlib
1786@item -nostdlib
1787Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1788command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1789(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1790
252b5132 1791@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1792@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1793@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1794@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1795file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1796@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1797object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1798object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1799should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1800usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1801name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1802list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1803command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1804this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1805@end ifclear
1806
76359541
TP
1807@kindex --out-implib
1808@item --out-implib @var{file}
1809Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1810the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1811library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1812may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1813behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1814step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1815the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1816
36af4a4e
JJ
1817@kindex -pie
1818@kindex --pic-executable
1819@item -pie
1820@itemx --pic-executable
1821@cindex position independent executables
1822Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1823ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1824libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1825address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1826normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1827defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1828
252b5132
RH
1829@kindex -qmagic
1830@item -qmagic
1831This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1832
1833@kindex -Qy
1834@item -Qy
1835This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1836
1837@kindex --relax
1838@cindex synthesizing linker
1839@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1840@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1841@item --relax
28d5f677 1842@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1843An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1844@ifset GENERIC
1845This option is only supported on a few targets.
1846@end ifset
1847@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1848@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1849@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1850@ifset XTENSA
1851@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1852@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1853@ifset M68HC11
1854@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1855@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1856@ifset NIOSII
1857@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1858@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1859@ifset POWERPC
1860@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1861@end ifset
252b5132 1862
28d5f677
NC
1863On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1864global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1865addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1866synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1867instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1868
1869On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1870debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1871@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1872This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1873family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1874@end ifset
1875
1876@ifset GENERIC
1877On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1878but ignored.
1879@end ifset
1880
28d5f677
NC
1881On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1882@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1883
252b5132
RH
1884@cindex retaining specified symbols
1885@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1886@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1887@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1888@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1889Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1890discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1891symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1892@ifset GENERIC
1893(such as VxWorks)
1894@end ifset
1895where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1896run-time memory.
1897
1898@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1899or symbols needed for relocations.
1900
1901You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1902line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1903
1904@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1905@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1906@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1907@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1908Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1909linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1910arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1911them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1912also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1913objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1914@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1915ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1916@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1917
ff5dcc92 1918The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1919SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1920@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1921runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1922options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1923gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1924file systems.
252b5132 1925
ff5dcc92 1926For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1927followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1928the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1929@end ifset
1930
1931@ifset GENERIC
1932@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1933@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1934@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1935When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1936happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1937of the input files.
1938
1939When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1940non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1941shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1942explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1943specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1944@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1945either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1946appearing multiple times.
1947
e680a6b6
NC
1948The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1949directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1950containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1951and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
195264-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1953
1954The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1955@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1956supported.
1957
28c309a2
NC
1958This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1959that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1960is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1961runtime linker would do.
1962
252b5132 1963The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1964libraries:
252b5132
RH
1965@enumerate
1966@item
ff5dcc92 1967Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1968@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1969Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1970between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1971specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1972used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1973at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1974by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1975the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1976@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1977On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1978@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1979environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1980@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1981On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1982directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1983@item
a1b8d843 1984For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1985variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1986@item
ec4eb78a
L
1987For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1988@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1989libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1990@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1991@item
252b5132
RH
1992The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1993@item
1994For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1995exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1996@end enumerate
1997
1998If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1999warning and continue with the link.
2000@end ifset
2001
2002@kindex -shared
2003@kindex -Bshareable
2004@item -shared
2005@itemx -Bshareable
2006@cindex shared libraries
2007Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2008and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2009shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2010undefined symbols in the link.
2011
252b5132 2012@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2013@item --sort-common
2014@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2015@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2016This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2017ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2018sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2019eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2020between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2021specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2022
2509a395
SL
2023@kindex --sort-section=name
2024@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2025This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2026patterns in the linker script.
2027
2509a395
SL
2028@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2029@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2030This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2031patterns in the linker script.
2032
a70f34c0
NC
2033@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2034@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2035This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2036.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2037post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2038
252b5132 2039@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2040@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2041Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2042each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2043size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2044
2045@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2046@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2047Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2048output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2049This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2050certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2051cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2052that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2053support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2054input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2055more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2056many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2057
2058@kindex --stats
2059@item --stats
2060Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2061as execution time and memory usage.
2062
2509a395 2063@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2064@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2065Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2066configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2067that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2068
a70f34c0
NC
2069@kindex --task-link
2070@item --task-link
2071This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2072file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2073
252b5132
RH
2074@kindex --traditional-format
2075@cindex traditional format
2076@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2077For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2078the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2079use the traditional format instead.
2080
2081@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2082For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2083symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2084full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2085@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2086trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2087combine duplicate entries.
2088
2509a395
SL
2089@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2090@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2091Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2092address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2093times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2094line.
2095@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2096for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2097@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2098should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2099sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2100
2509a395
SL
2101@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2102@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2103@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2104@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2105@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2106@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2107@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2108Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2109@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2110
2509a395
SL
2111@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2112@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2113@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2114When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2115byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2116
9d5777a3
RM
2117@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2118@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2119@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2120When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2121the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2122text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2123
0d705e9f
AM
2124@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2125@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2126@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2127When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2128model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2129
560e09e9
NC
2130@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2131@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2132Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2133values for @samp{method}:
2134
2135@table @samp
2136@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2137Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2138
2139@item report-all
da8bce14 2140Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2141
2142@item ignore-in-object-files
2143Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2144ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2145
2146@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2147Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2148ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2149when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2150libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2151command line.
2152@end table
2153
2154The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2155by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2156
2157Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2158unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2159can change this to a warning.
2160
1715a13c
L
2161@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2162@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2163@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2164@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2165Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2166supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2167the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2168argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2169
2170@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2171@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2172@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2173Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2174used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2175about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2176is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2177see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2178use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2179symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2180@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2181
7ce691ae 2182@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2183@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2184@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2185@item --warn-common
2186Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2187a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2188but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2189you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2190Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2191warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2192
2193There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2194
2195@table @samp
2196@item int i = 1;
2197A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2198file.
2199
2200@item extern int i;
2201An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2202There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2203variable somewhere.
2204
2205@item int i;
2206A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2207variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2208The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2209single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2210size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2211a definition of the same variable.
2212@end table
2213
2214The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2215Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2216just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2217encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2218a common symbol.
2219
2220@enumerate
2221@item
2222Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2223definition for the symbol.
2224@smallexample
2225@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2226 overridden by definition
2227@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2228@end smallexample
2229
2230@item
2231Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2232the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2233except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2234@smallexample
2235@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2236 overriding common
2237@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2238@end smallexample
2239
2240@item
2241Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2242@smallexample
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2244 of `@var{symbol}'
2245@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2246@end smallexample
2247
2248@item
2249Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2250@smallexample
2251@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2252 overridden by larger common
2253@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2254@end smallexample
2255
2256@item
2257Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2258the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2259encountered in a different order.
2260@smallexample
2261@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2262 overriding smaller common
2263@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2264@end smallexample
2265@end enumerate
2266
2267@kindex --warn-constructors
2268@item --warn-constructors
2269Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2270object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2271detect the use of global constructors.
2272
2273@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2274@item --warn-multiple-gp
2275Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2276This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2277Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2278section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2279of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2280base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2281base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2282bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2283large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2284values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2285option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2286
2287@kindex --warn-once
2288@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2289@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2290@item --warn-once
2291Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2292which refers to it.
2293
2294@kindex --warn-section-align
2295@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2296@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2297@item --warn-section-align
2298Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2299alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2300The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2301is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2302the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2303
8fdd7217
NC
2304@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2305@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2306Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2307
a0c402a5
L
2308@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2309@item --warn-alternate-em
2310Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2311
560e09e9
NC
2312@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2313@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2314If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2315@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2316This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2317
2318@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2319@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2320This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2321it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2322
252b5132
RH
2323@kindex --whole-archive
2324@cindex including an entire archive
2325@item --whole-archive
2326For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2327@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2328in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2329files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2330library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2331library. This option may be used more than once.
2332
7ec229ce 2333Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2334about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2335Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2336list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2337your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2338
2509a395
SL
2339@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2340@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2341Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2342@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2343undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2344@var{symbol}.
2345
2346This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2347wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2348wishes to call the system function, it should call
2349@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2350
2351Here is a trivial example:
2352
2353@smallexample
2354void *
cc2f008e 2355__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2356@{
cc2f008e 2357 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2358 return __real_malloc (c);
2359@}
2360@end smallexample
2361
ff5dcc92 2362If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2363all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2364instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2365call the real @code{malloc} function.
2366
2367You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2368links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2369you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2370file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2371call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2372
6aa29e7b 2373@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2374@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2375@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2376@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2377Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2378(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2379section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2380
e41b3a13
JJ
2381@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2382@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2383Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2384generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2385if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2386
6c1439be
L
2387@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2388@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2389@item --enable-new-dtags
2390@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2391This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2392systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2393@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2394and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2395If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2396created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2397those options are only available for ELF systems.
2398
2d643429 2399@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2400@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2401Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2402close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2403time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2404increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2405value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2406
fdc90cb4
JJ
2407@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2408@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2409Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2410@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2411new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2412the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2413hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2414but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2415
0ce398f1
L
2416@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2417@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2418@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2419@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2420@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2421@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2422@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2423@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2424On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2425compressed using zlib.
2426
2427@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2428sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2429DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2430instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2431also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2432sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2433
2434The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2435@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2436
2437Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2438sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2439for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2440uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2441
2442The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2443involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2444default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2445@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2446
35835446
JR
2447@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2448@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2449This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2450linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2451for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2452about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2453
4f9c04f7 2454Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24551021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2456run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2457has been used.
2458
2459The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2460enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2461
c0065db7
RM
2462@kindex --build-id
2463@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2464@item --build-id
2465@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2466Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2467or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2468unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2469@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2470@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2471@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2472the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2473string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2474@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2475is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2476
2477The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2478that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2479unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2480to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2481file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2482string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2483
2484Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2485@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2486@end table
2487
0285c67d
NC
2488@c man end
2489
36f63dca 2490@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2491
0285c67d
NC
2492@c man begin OPTIONS
2493
ff5dcc92 2494The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2495the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2496normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2497use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2498@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2499like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2500symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2501object file).
2502
2503In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2504support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2505PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2506values by either a space or an equals sign.
2507
ff5dcc92 2508@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2509
2510@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2511@item --add-stdcall-alias
2512If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2513as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2514[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2515
2516@kindex --base-file
2517@item --base-file @var{file}
2518Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2519addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2520@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2521[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2522
2523@kindex --dll
2524@item --dll
2525Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2526@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2527file.
bb10df36 2528[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2529
88183869
DK
2530@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2531@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2532@item --enable-long-section-names
2533@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2534The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2535the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2536for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2537fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2538to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2539allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2540disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2541generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2542as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2543with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2544GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2545information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2546option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2547section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2548when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2549image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2550[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2551
252b5132
RH
2552@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2553@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2554@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2555@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2556If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2557do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2558only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2559resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2560undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2561@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2562to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2563warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2564import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2565to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2566feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2567@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2568mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2570
522f09cd
KT
2571@kindex --leading-underscore
2572@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2573@item --leading-underscore
2574@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2575For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2576in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2577disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2578
252b5132
RH
2579@cindex DLLs, creating
2580@kindex --export-all-symbols
2581@item --export-all-symbols
2582If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2583be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2584otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2585explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2586attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2587option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2588@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2589@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2590exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2591re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2592such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2593@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2594@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2595Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2596not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2597extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2598(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2599These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2600@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2601@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2602@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2603@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2604[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2605
2606@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2607@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2608Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2609exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2610[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2611
2927aaca
NC
2612@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2613@item --exclude-all-symbols
2614Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2615[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2616
252b5132
RH
2617@kindex --file-alignment
2618@item --file-alignment
2619Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2620file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2621512.
bb10df36 2622[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2623
2624@cindex heap size
2625@kindex --heap
2626@item --heap @var{reserve}
2627@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2628Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2629to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2630committed.
bb10df36 2631[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2632
2633@cindex image base
2634@kindex --image-base
2635@item --image-base @var{value}
2636Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2637the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2638is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2639your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2640other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2641for dlls.
bb10df36 2642[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2643
2644@kindex --kill-at
2645@item --kill-at
2646If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2647symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2648[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2649
26d2d8a2
BF
2650@kindex --large-address-aware
2651@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2652If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2653header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2654greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2655or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2656section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2657[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2658
f69a2f97
NC
2659@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2660@item --disable-large-address-aware
2661Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2662This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2663driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2664addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2665[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2666
252b5132
RH
2667@kindex --major-image-version
2668@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2669Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2670[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2671
2672@kindex --major-os-version
2673@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2674Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2675[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2676
2677@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2678@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2679Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2680[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2681
2682@kindex --minor-image-version
2683@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2684Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2685[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2686
2687@kindex --minor-os-version
2688@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2689Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2690[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2691
2692@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2693@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2694Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2695[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2696
2697@cindex DEF files, creating
2698@cindex DLLs, creating
2699@kindex --output-def
2700@item --output-def @var{file}
2701The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2702file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2703(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2704library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2705automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2706[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2707
b044cda1 2708@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2709@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2710@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2711@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2712Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2713@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2714By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2715for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2716execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2717[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2718
2719@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2720@item --disable-auto-image-base
2721Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2722user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2723default.
bb10df36 2724[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2725
2726@cindex DLLs, linking to
2727@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2728@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2729When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2730search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2731@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2732between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2733uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2734@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2735[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2736
2737@kindex --enable-auto-import
2738@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2739Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2740DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2741mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2742[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2743
2744The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2745feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2746
2747Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2748of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2749PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2750
e2a83dd0
NC
2751Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2752data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2753placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2754around a problem with consts that is described here:
2755http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2756
4d8907ac
DS
2757Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2758see this message:
0d888aac 2759
ece2d90e 2760"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2761documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2762
ece2d90e
NC
2763This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2764ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2765allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2766fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2767constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2768multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2769this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2770of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2771the warning, and exit.
2772
2773There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2774data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2775
2fa9fc65
NC
2776One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2777of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2778this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2779
c0065db7
RM
2780A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2781that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2782there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2783a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2784
2785@example
2786extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2787extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2788 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2789@end example
2790
2791or
2792
2793@example
2794extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2795extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2796 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2797@end example
2798
c0065db7 2799For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2800is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2801
2802@example
2803extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2804extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2805 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2806@end example
2807
c406afaf
NC
2808or
2809
2810@example
2811extern long long extern_ll;
2812extern_ll -->
2813 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2814@end example
2815
2fa9fc65 2816A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2817'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2818@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2819requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2820building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2821merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2822between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2823constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2824
2825Original:
2826@example
2827--foo.h
2828extern int arr[];
2829--foo.c
2830#include "foo.h"
2831void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2832 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2833@}
2834@end example
2835
2836Solution 1:
2837@example
2838--foo.h
2839extern int arr[];
2840--foo.c
2841#include "foo.h"
2842void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2843 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2844 volatile int *parr = arr;
2845 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2846@}
2847@end example
2848
2849Solution 2:
2850@example
2851--foo.h
2852/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2853#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2854 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2855#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2856#else
2857#define FOO_IMPORT
2858#endif
2859extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2860--foo.c
2861#include "foo.h"
2862void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2863 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2864@}
2865@end example
2866
c0065db7 2867A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2868library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2869for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2870functions).
b044cda1
CW
2871
2872@kindex --disable-auto-import
2873@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2874Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2875@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2876[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2877
2fa9fc65
NC
2878@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2879@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2880If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2881that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2882a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2883environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2884[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2885
2886@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2887@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2888Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2889[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2890
b044cda1
CW
2891@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2892@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2893Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2894[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2895
252b5132
RH
2896@kindex --section-alignment
2897@item --section-alignment
2898Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2899addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2900[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2901
2902@cindex stack size
2903@kindex --stack
2904@item --stack @var{reserve}
2905@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2906Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2907to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2908committed.
bb10df36 2909[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2910
2911@kindex --subsystem
2912@item --subsystem @var{which}
2913@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2914@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2915Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2916legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2917@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2918the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2919@var{which}.
bb10df36 2920[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2921
2f563b51
DK
2922The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2923of the PE file header:
2924[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2925
2d5c3743
NC
2926@kindex --high-entropy-va
2927@item --high-entropy-va
2928Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2929(ASLR).
2930
2f563b51
DK
2931@kindex --dynamicbase
2932@item --dynamicbase
2933The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2934randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2935Vista for i386 PE targets.
2936
2937@kindex --forceinteg
2938@item --forceinteg
2939Code integrity checks are enforced.
2940
2941@kindex --nxcompat
2942@item --nxcompat
2943The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2944This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2945
2946@kindex --no-isolation
2947@item --no-isolation
2948Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2949
2950@kindex --no-seh
2951@item --no-seh
2952The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2953this image.
2954
2955@kindex --no-bind
2956@item --no-bind
2957Do not bind this image.
2958
2959@kindex --wdmdriver
2960@item --wdmdriver
2961The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2962
2f563b51
DK
2963@kindex --tsaware
2964@item --tsaware
2965The image is Terminal Server aware.
2966
0cb112f7
CF
2967@kindex --insert-timestamp
2968@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2969@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2970Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2971as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2972other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2973will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2974same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2975can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2976that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2977identically.
252b5132
RH
2978@end table
2979
0285c67d
NC
2980@c man end
2981
ac145307
BS
2982@ifset C6X
2983@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2984
2985@c man begin OPTIONS
2986
2987The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2988libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2989all executables use an index of 0.
2990
2991@table @gcctabopt
2992
2993@kindex --dsbt-size
2994@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2995This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2996or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2997entries.
2998
2999@kindex --dsbt-index
3000@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3001This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3002to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3003executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3004@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3005
fbd9ad90
PB
3006@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3007The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3008exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3009
ac145307
BS
3010@end table
3011
3012@c man end
3013@end ifset
3014
b8891f8d
AJ
3015@ifset CSKY
3016@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3017
3018@c man begin OPTIONS
3019
3020@table @gcctabopt
3021
3022@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3023@item --branch-stub
3024This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3025sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3026usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3027can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3028the compiler or assembler.
3029
3030@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3031@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3032This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3033It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3034be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3035stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3036sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3037@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3038linker should choose suitable defaults.
3039
3040@end table
3041
3042@c man end
3043@end ifset
3044
93fd0973
SC
3045@ifset M68HC11
3046@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3047
3048@c man begin OPTIONS
3049
3050The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3051memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3052
3053@table @gcctabopt
3054
3055@kindex --no-trampoline
3056@item --no-trampoline
3057This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3058is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3059instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3060
3061@kindex --bank-window
3062@item --bank-window @var{name}
3063This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3064the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3065The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3066paging and addresses within the memory window.
3067
3068@end table
3069
3070@c man end
3071@end ifset
3072
7fb9f789
NC
3073@ifset M68K
3074@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3075
3076@c man begin OPTIONS
3077
3078The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3079when linking for 68K targets.
3080
3081@table @gcctabopt
3082
3083@kindex --got
3084@item --got=@var{type}
3085This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3086@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3087@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3088Info entry for @file{ld}.
3089
3090@end table
3091
3092@c man end
3093@end ifset
3094
833794fc
MR
3095@ifset MIPS
3096@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3097
3098@c man begin OPTIONS
3099
3100The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3101generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3102linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3103
3104@table @gcctabopt
3105
3106@kindex --insn32
3107@item --insn32
3108@kindex --no-insn32
3109@itemx --no-insn32
3110These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3111generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3112or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
311332-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3114used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3115possible.
3116
8b10b0b3
MR
3117@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3118@item --ignore-branch-isa
3119@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3120@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3121These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3122transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3123accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3124is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3125instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3126equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3127calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3128a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3129an error.
3130
833794fc
MR
3131@end table
3132
3133@c man end
3134@end ifset
3135
252b5132
RH
3136@ifset UsesEnvVars
3137@node Environment
3138@section Environment Variables
3139
0285c67d
NC
3140@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3141
560e09e9 3142You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3143@ifclear SingleFormat
3144@code{GNUTARGET},
3145@end ifclear
3146@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3147
36f63dca 3148@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3149@kindex GNUTARGET
3150@cindex default input format
3151@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3152use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3153of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3154@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3155of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3156attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3157this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3158there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3159object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3160BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3161in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3162@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3163
3164@kindex LDEMULATION
3165@cindex default emulation
3166@cindex emulation, default
3167@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3168@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3169behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3170available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3171the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3172variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3173linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3174
3175@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3176@cindex demangling, default
3177Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3178@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3179default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3180a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3181may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3182options.
3183
0285c67d
NC
3184@c man end
3185@end ifset
3186
252b5132
RH
3187@node Scripts
3188@chapter Linker Scripts
3189
3190@cindex scripts
3191@cindex linker scripts
3192@cindex command files
3193Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3194written in the linker command language.
3195
3196The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3197the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3198the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3199more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3200direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3201described below.
3202
3203The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3204yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3205linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3206to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3207such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3208
3209You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3210line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3211default linker script.
3212
3213You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3214to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3215Linker Scripts}.
3216
3217@menu
3218* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3219* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3220* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3221* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3222* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3223* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3224* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3225* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3226* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3227* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3228* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3229@end menu
3230
3231@node Basic Script Concepts
3232@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3233@cindex linker script concepts
3234We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3235describe the linker script language.
3236
3237The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3238file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3239@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3240The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3241purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3242among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3243section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3244in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3245
3246Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3247also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3248contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3249the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3250A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3251area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3252loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3253which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3254of debugging information.
3255
3256Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3257first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3258the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3259@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3260section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3261same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3262is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3263(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3264based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3265RAM address would be the VMA.
3266
3267You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3268program with the @samp{-h} option.
3269
3270Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3271@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3272has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3273information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3274will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3275static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3276referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3277
3278You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3279program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3280option.
3281
3282@node Script Format
3283@section Linker Script Format
3284@cindex linker script format
3285Linker scripts are text files.
3286
3287You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3288either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3289symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3290generally ignored.
3291
3292Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3293If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3294otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3295double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3296file name.
3297
3298You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3299@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3300to whitespace.
3301
3302@node Simple Example
3303@section Simple Linker Script Example
3304@cindex linker script example
3305@cindex example of linker script
3306Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3307
3308The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3309@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3310memory layout of the output file.
3311
3312The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3313describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3314code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3315@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3316Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3317your input files.
3318
3319For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33200x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3321linker script which will do that:
3322@smallexample
3323SECTIONS
3324@{
3325 . = 0x10000;
3326 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3327 . = 0x8000000;
3328 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3329 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3330@}
3331@end smallexample
3332
3333You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3334followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3335descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3336
252b5132
RH
3337The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3338sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3339counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3340other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3341current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3342incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3343@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3344
3345The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3346required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3347after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3348which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3349wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3350means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3351
3352Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3353@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3354@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3355
3356The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3357the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3358at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3359output section, the value of the location counter will be
3360@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3361effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3362immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3363
3364The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3365alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3366example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3367sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3368may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3369sections.
3370
3371That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3372
3373@node Simple Commands
3374@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3375@cindex linker script simple commands
3376In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3377
3378@menu
3379* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3380* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3381@ifclear SingleFormat
3382* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3383@end ifclear
3384
4a93e180 3385* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3386* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3387@end menu
3388
3389@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3390@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3391@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3392@cindex start of execution
3393@cindex first instruction
3394@cindex entry point
3395The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3396point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3397entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3398@smallexample
3399ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3400@end smallexample
3401
3402There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3403entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3404stopping when one of them succeeds:
3405@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3406@item
252b5132 3407the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3408@item
252b5132 3409the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3410@item
3ab904c4 3411the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3412targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3413check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3414@item
252b5132 3415the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3416@item
252b5132
RH
3417The address @code{0}.
3418@end itemize
3419
3420@node File Commands
36f63dca 3421@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3422@cindex linker script file commands
3423Several linker script commands deal with files.
3424
3425@table @code
3426@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3427@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3428@cindex including a linker script
3429Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3430be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3431with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
343210 levels deep.
3433
4006703d
NS
3434You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3435@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3436
252b5132
RH
3437@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3438@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3439@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3440@cindex input files in linker scripts
3441@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3442@cindex linker script input object files
3443The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3444in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3445
3446For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3447a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3448then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3449
3450In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3451script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3452
e3f2db7f
AO
3453In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3454with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3455located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3456for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3457open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3458linker will search through the archive library search path.
3459The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3460as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3461path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3462@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3463
ff5dcc92 3464If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3465name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3466@samp{-l}.
3467
3468When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3469files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3470script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3471
3472@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3473@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3474@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3475@cindex grouping input files
3476The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3477files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3478new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3479in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3480
b717d30e
JJ
3481@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3482@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3483@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3484This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3485commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3486as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3487with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3488when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3489@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3490and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3491setting afterwards.
3492
252b5132
RH
3493@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3494@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3495@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3496The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3497@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3498@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3499Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3500precedence.
3501
3502You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3503output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3504
3505@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3506@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3507@cindex library search path in linker script
3508@cindex archive search path in linker script
3509@cindex search path in linker script
3510The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3511@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3512@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3513on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3514are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3515the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3516
3517@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3518@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3519@cindex first input file
3520The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3521that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3522though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3523when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3524first file.
3525@end table
3526
3527@ifclear SingleFormat
3528@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3529@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3530A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3531
3532@table @code
3533@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3534@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3535@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3536@cindex output file format in linker script
3537The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3538output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3539exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3540(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3541line option takes precedence.
3542
3543You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3544formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3545This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3546desired endianness.
3547
3548If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3549will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3550output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3551used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3552
3553For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3554command:
3555@smallexample
3556OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3557@end smallexample
3558This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3559@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3560option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3561format.
3562
3563@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3564@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3565@cindex input file format in linker script
3566The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3567files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3568This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3569(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3570is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3571command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3572@end table
3573@end ifclear
3574
4a93e180
NC
3575@node REGION_ALIAS
3576@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3577@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3578@cindex region alias
3579@cindex region names
3580
3581Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3582@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3583
3584@smallexample
3585REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3586@end smallexample
3587
3588The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3589memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3590to memory regions. An example follows.
3591
3592Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3593memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3594that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3595non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3596access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3597read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3598sections:
3599
3600@itemize @bullet
3601@item
3602@code{.text} program code;
3603@item
3604@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3605@item
3606@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3607@item
3608@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3609@end itemize
3610
3611The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3612part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3613output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3614systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3615@code{C}:
3616@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3617@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3618@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3619@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3620@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3621@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3622@end multitable
3623The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3624loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3625the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3626the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3627
3628The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3629includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3630memory layout:
3631@smallexample
3632INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3633
3634SECTIONS
3635 @{
3636 .text :
3637 @{
3638 *(.text)
3639 @} > REGION_TEXT
3640 .rodata :
3641 @{
3642 *(.rodata)
3643 rodata_end = .;
3644 @} > REGION_RODATA
3645 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3646 @{
3647 data_start = .;
3648 *(.data)
3649 @} > REGION_DATA
3650 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3651 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3652 .bss :
3653 @{
3654 *(.bss)
3655 @} > REGION_BSS
3656 @}
3657@end smallexample
3658
3659Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3660regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3661variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3662@table @code
3663@item A
3664Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3665@smallexample
3666MEMORY
3667 @{
3668 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3669 @}
3670
3671REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3672REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3673REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3674REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3675@end smallexample
3676@item B
3677Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3678into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3679@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3680@smallexample
3681MEMORY
3682 @{
3683 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3684 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3685 @}
3686
3687REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3688REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3689REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3690REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3691@end smallexample
3692@item C
3693Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3694@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3695initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3696system start into the @code{RAM}.
3697@smallexample
3698MEMORY
3699 @{
3700 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3701 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3702 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3703 @}
3704
3705REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3706REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3707REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3708REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3709@end smallexample
3710@end table
3711
3712It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3713@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3714necessary:
3715@smallexample
3716#include <string.h>
3717
3718extern char data_start [];
3719extern char data_size [];
3720extern char data_load_start [];
3721
3722void copy_data(void)
3723@{
3724 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3725 @{
3726 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3727 @}
3728@}
3729@end smallexample
3730
252b5132 3731@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3732@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3733There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3734
3735@table @code
3736@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3737@kindex ASSERT
3738@cindex assertion in linker script
3739Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3740with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3741
fd1c4238
NC
3742Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3743take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3744inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3745for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3746symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3747
3748@smallexample
3749 .stack :
3750 @{
3751 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3752 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3753 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3754 @}
3755@end smallexample
3756
3757will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3758PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3759can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3760
3761@smallexample
3762 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3763 .stack :
3764 @{
3765 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3766 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3767 @}
3768@end smallexample
3769
3770will work.
3771
252b5132
RH
3772@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3773@kindex EXTERN
3774@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3775Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3776symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3777modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3778each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3779command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3780
3781@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3782@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3783@cindex common allocation in linker script
3784This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3785to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3786output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3787
4818e05f
AM
3788@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3789@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3790@cindex common allocation in linker script
3791This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3792command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3793to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3794
7bdf4127
AB
3795@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3796@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3797@cindex group allocation in linker script
3798@cindex section groups
3799@cindex COMDAT
3800This command has the same effect as the
3801@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3802@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3803and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3804specified (@samp{-r}).
3805
53d25da6
AM
3806@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3807@kindex INSERT
3808@cindex insert user script into default script
3809This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3810augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3811inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3812@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3813default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3814sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3815linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3816insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3817linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3818default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3819of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3820to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3821is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3822
3823@smallexample
3824SECTIONS
3825@{
3826 OVERLAY :
3827 @{
3828 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3829 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3830 @}
3831@}
3832INSERT AFTER .text;
3833@end smallexample
3834
252b5132
RH
3835@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3836@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3837@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3838This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3839references among certain output sections.
3840
3841In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3842using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3843will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3844errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3845a function defined in the other section.
3846
3847The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3848@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3849an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3850@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3851names.
3852
cdf96953
MF
3853@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3854@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3855@cindex cross references
3856This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3857references to one section from a list of other sections.
3858
3859The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3860output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3861a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3862there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3863must never call back.
3864
3865The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3866The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3867If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3868the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3869status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3870names, not input section names.
3871
252b5132
RH
3872@ifclear SingleFormat
3873@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3874@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3875@cindex machine architecture
3876@cindex architecture
3877Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3878of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3879architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3880the @samp{-f} option.
3881@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3882
3883@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3884@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3885This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3886@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3887in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3888@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3889@end table
3890
3891@node Assignments
3892@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3893@cindex assignment in scripts
3894@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3895@cindex variables, defining
3896You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3897the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3898
3899@menu
3900* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3901* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3902* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3903* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3904* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3905@end menu
3906
3907@node Simple Assignments
3908@subsection Simple Assignments
3909
3910You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3911
3912@table @code
3913@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3914@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3915@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3916@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3917@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3918@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3919@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3920@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3921@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3922@end table
3923
3924The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3925@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3926defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3927
3928The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3929may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3930
3931The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3932
3933Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3934
3935You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3936statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3937section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3938
3939The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3940expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3941
3942Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3943assignments may be used:
3944
3945@smallexample
3946floating_point = 0;
3947SECTIONS
3948@{
3949 .text :
3950 @{
3951 *(.text)
3952 _etext = .;
3953 @}
156e34dd 3954 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3955 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3956@}
3957@end smallexample
3958@noindent
3959In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3960zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3961the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3962defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3963upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3964
eb8476a6
MR
3965@node HIDDEN
3966@subsection HIDDEN
3967@cindex HIDDEN
3968For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3969exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3970
3971Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3972@code{HIDDEN}:
3973
3974@smallexample
3975HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3976SECTIONS
3977@{
3978 .text :
3979 @{
3980 *(.text)
3981 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3982 @}
3983 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3984 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3985@}
3986@end smallexample
3987@noindent
3988In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3989
252b5132
RH
3990@node PROVIDE
3991@subsection PROVIDE
3992@cindex PROVIDE
3993In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3994only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3995the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3996@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3997@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3998@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3999@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4000@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4001
4002Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4003@smallexample
4004SECTIONS
4005@{
4006 .text :
4007 @{
4008 *(.text)
4009 _etext = .;
4010 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4011 @}
4012@}
4013@end smallexample
4014
4015In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4016underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4017the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4018underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4019If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4020linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4021
b0daac83
NC
4022Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4023defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4024that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4025when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4026@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4027
7af8e998
L
4028@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4029@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4030@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4031Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4032hidden and won't be exported.
4033
73ae6183
NC
4034@node Source Code Reference
4035@subsection Source Code Reference
4036
4037Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4038intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4039a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4040symbol that does not have a value.
4041
4042Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4043transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4044stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4045prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4046mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4047of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4048variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4049linker script variable might be referred to as:
4050
4051@smallexample
4052 extern int foo;
4053@end smallexample
4054
4055But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4056
4057@smallexample
4058 _foo = 1000;
4059@end smallexample
4060
4061In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4062transformation has taken place.
4063
4064When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4065things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4066in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4067second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4068table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4069contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4070value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4071
4072@smallexample
4073 int foo = 1000;
4074@end smallexample
4075
10bf6894 4076creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4077holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4078number 1000 is initially stored.
4079
4080When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4081first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4082memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4083So:
4084
4085@smallexample
4086 foo = 1;
4087@end smallexample
4088
4089looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4090associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4091address. Whereas:
4092
4093@smallexample
4094 int * a = & foo;
4095@end smallexample
4096
10bf6894 4097looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4098and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4099the variable @samp{a}.
4100
4101Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4102the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4103an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4104
4105@smallexample
4106 foo = 1000;
4107@end smallexample
4108
4109creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4110the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4111address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4112linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4113access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4114
4115Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4116you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4117use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4118section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4119linker script contains these declarations:
4120
4121@smallexample
4122@group
4123 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4124 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4125 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4126@end group
4127@end smallexample
4128
4129Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4130
4131@smallexample
4132@group
4133 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4134
73ae6183
NC
4135 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4136@end group
4137@end smallexample
4138
4139Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4140Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4141arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4142
4143@smallexample
4144@group
4145 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4146
4147 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4148@end group
4149@end smallexample
4150
4151Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4152operators.
73ae6183 4153
252b5132 4154@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4155@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4156@kindex SECTIONS
4157The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4158into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4159
4160The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4161@smallexample
4162SECTIONS
4163@{
4164 @var{sections-command}
4165 @var{sections-command}
4166 @dots{}
4167@}
4168@end smallexample
4169
4170Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4171
4172@itemize @bullet
4173@item
4174an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4175@item
4176a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4177@item
4178an output section description
4179@item
4180an overlay description
4181@end itemize
4182
4183The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4184@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4185those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4186understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4187the layout of the output file.
4188
4189Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4190below.
4191
4192If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4193linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4194section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4195input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4196example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4197in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4198
4199@menu
4200* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4201* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4202* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4203* Input Section:: Input section description
4204* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4205* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4206* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4207* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4208* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4209@end menu
4210
4211@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4212@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4213The full description of an output section looks like this:
4214@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4215@group
7e7d5768 4216@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4217 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4218 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4219 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4220 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4221 @{
4222 @var{output-section-command}
4223 @var{output-section-command}
4224 @dots{}
abc9061b 4225 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4226@end group
4227@end smallexample
4228
4229Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4230
4231The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4232name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4233The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4234the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4235The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4236
4237Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4238
4239@itemize @bullet
4240@item
4241a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4242@item
4243an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4244@item
4245data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4246@item
4247a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4248@end itemize
4249
4250@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4251@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4252@cindex name, section
4253@cindex section name
4254The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4255meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4256support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4257must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4258example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4259output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4260names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4261quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4262characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4263commas must be quoted.
4264
4265The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4266Discarding}.
4267
4268@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4269@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4270@cindex address, section
4271@cindex section address
4272The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4273address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4274is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4275
4276If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4277section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4278to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4279alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4280contained within the output section.
4281
4282The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4283
4284@itemize @bullet
4285@item
4286If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4287is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4288in that region.
4289
4290@item
4291If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4292regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4293section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4294be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4295
4296@item
4297If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4298the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4299counter.
4300@end itemize
4301
4302@noindent
4303For example:
4304
252b5132
RH
4305@smallexample
4306.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4307@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4308
252b5132
RH
4309@noindent
4310and
ea5cae92 4311
252b5132
RH
4312@smallexample
4313.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4314@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4315
252b5132
RH
4316@noindent
4317are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4318@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4319counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4320counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4321input sections.
252b5132
RH
4322
4323The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4324For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4325so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4326do something like this:
4327@smallexample
4328.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4329@end smallexample
4330@noindent
4331This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4332aligned upward to the specified value.
4333
4334Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4335location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4336sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4337
4338@node Input Section
36f63dca 4339@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4340@cindex input sections
4341@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4342The most common output section command is an input section description.
4343
4344The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4345You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4346in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4347map the input files into your memory layout.
4348
4349@menu
4350* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4351* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4352* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4353* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4354* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4355@end menu
4356
4357@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4358@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4359@cindex input section basics
4360An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4361by a list of section names in parentheses.
4362
4363The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4364describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4365
4366The most common input section description is to include all input
4367sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4368include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4369@smallexample
4370*(.text)
4371@end smallexample
4372@noindent
18625d54 4373Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4374@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4375of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4376match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4377example:
252b5132 4378@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4379EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4380@end smallexample
4381@noindent
4382will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4383and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4384placed inside the section list, for example:
4385@smallexample
b4346c09 4386*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4387@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4388@noindent
4389The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4390two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4391more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4392
4393There are two ways to include more than one section:
4394@smallexample
4395*(.text .rdata)
4396*(.text) *(.rdata)
4397@end smallexample
4398@noindent
4399The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4400@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4401first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4402they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4403@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4404@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4405
8f1732fc
AB
4406When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4407is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4408immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4409@smallexample
4410*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4411@end smallexample
4412@noindent
4413will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4414@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4415from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4416exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4417could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4418@smallexample
4419*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4420@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4421@noindent
4422Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4423before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4424all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4425@smallexample
4426EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4427@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4428
252b5132
RH
4429You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4430You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4431needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4432@smallexample
4433data.o(.data)
4434@end smallexample
4435
ae17ab41
CM
4436To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4437of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4438
4439Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4440
4441@smallexample
4442@group
4443SECTIONS @{
4444 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4445 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4446@}
4447@end group
4448@end smallexample
4449
4450In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4451input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4452@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4453@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4454whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4455
967928e9
AM
4456You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4457matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4458with no whitespace around the colon.
4459
4460@table @samp
4461@item archive:file
4462matches file within archive
4463@item archive:
4464matches the whole archive
4465@item :file
4466matches file but not one in an archive
4467@end table
4468
4469Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4470wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4471single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4472@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4473within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4474also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4475other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4476from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4477command.
4478
252b5132
RH
4479If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4480the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4481commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4482@smallexample
4483data.o
4484@end smallexample
4485
967928e9
AM
4486When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4487and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4488characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4489name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4490did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4491though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4492@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4493the archive search path.
4494
4495@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4496@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4497@cindex input section wildcards
4498@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4499@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4500@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4501In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4502name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4503
4504The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4505pattern for the file name.
4506
4507The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4508
4509@table @samp
4510@item *
4511matches any number of characters
4512@item ?
4513matches any single character
4514@item [@var{chars}]
4515matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4516character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4517@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4518@item \
4519quotes the following character
4520@end table
4521
4522When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4523will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4524Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4525exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4526@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4527a @samp{/} character.
4528
4529File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4530specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4531does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4532
4533If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4534appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4535will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4536sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4537@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4538@smallexample
4539.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4540.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4541@end smallexample
4542
bcaa7b3e 4543@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4544Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4545in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4546this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4547pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4548@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4549into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4550
bcaa7b3e
L
4551@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4552@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4553difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4554descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4555Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4556reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4557
02ecc8e9
L
4558@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4559@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4560difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4561ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4562encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4563
bcaa7b3e
L
4564@cindex SORT
4565@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4566
4567When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4568can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4569
4570@enumerate
4571@item
4572@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4573It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4574sections have the same name.
4575@item
4576@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4577It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4578sections have the same alignment.
4579@item
c0065db7 4580@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4581treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4582@item
4583@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4584is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4585@item
4586All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4587@end enumerate
4588
a05a5b64 4589When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4590section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4591takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4592
4593If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4594command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4595treated as nested sorting command.
4596
4597@enumerate
4598@item
4599@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4600@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4601@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4602@item
4603@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4604@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4605@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4606@end enumerate
4607
4608If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4609command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4610
eda680f8 4611@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4612@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4613section sorting option.
4614
252b5132
RH
4615If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4616@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4617precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4618
4619This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4620files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4621sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4622The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4623with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4624linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4625@smallexample
4626@group
4627SECTIONS @{
4628 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4629 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4630 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4631 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4632@}
4633@end group
4634@end smallexample
4635
4636@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4637@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4638@cindex common symbol placement
4639@cindex uninitialized data placement
4640A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4641file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4642linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4643named @samp{COMMON}.
4644
4645You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4646other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4647particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4648input files are placed in another section.
4649
4650In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4651@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4652@smallexample
4653.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4654@end smallexample
4655
4656@cindex scommon section
4657@cindex small common symbols
4658Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4659example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4660symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4661different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4662the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4663symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4664to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4665locations.
4666
4667@cindex [COMMON]
4668You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4669notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4670@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4671
4672@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4673@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4674@cindex KEEP
4675@cindex garbage collection
4676When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4677it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4678This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4679with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4680@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4681
4682@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4683@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4684The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4685to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4686start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4687@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4688follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4689@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4690@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4691All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4692files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4693
4694@smallexample
4695@group
4696SECTIONS @{
4697 outputa 0x10000 :
4698 @{
4699 all.o
4700 foo.o (.input1)
4701 @}
36f63dca
NC
4702@end group
4703@group
252b5132
RH
4704 outputb :
4705 @{
4706 foo.o (.input2)
4707 foo1.o (.input1)
4708 @}
36f63dca
NC
4709@end group
4710@group
252b5132
RH
4711 outputc :
4712 @{
4713 *(.input1)
4714 *(.input2)
4715 @}
4716@}
4717@end group
a1ab1d2a 4718@end smallexample
252b5132 4719
cbd0eecf
L
4720If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4721and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4722automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4723__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4724indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4725respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4726C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4727
252b5132 4728@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4729@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4730@cindex data
4731@cindex section data
4732@cindex output section data
4733@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4734@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4735@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4736@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4737@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4738You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4739@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4740an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4741parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4742value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4743counter.
4744
4745The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4746store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4747bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4748stored.
4749
4750For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4751of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4752@smallexample
4753BYTE(1)
4754LONG(addr)
4755@end smallexample
4756
4757When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4758same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4759target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4760@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4761@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4762
4763If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4764which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4765When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4766true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4767endianness of the first input object file.
4768
36f63dca 4769Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4770between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4771@smallexample
4772SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4773@end smallexample
4774whereas this will work:
4775@smallexample
4776SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4777@end smallexample
4778
252b5132
RH
4779@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4780@cindex holes, filling
4781@cindex unspecified memory
4782You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4783current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4784otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4785gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4786with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4787necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4788point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4789than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4790different parts of an output section.
4791
4792This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4793value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4794@smallexample
563e308f 4795FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4796@end smallexample
4797
4798The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4799section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4800part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4801entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4802precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4803expression.
252b5132
RH
4804
4805@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4806@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4807There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4808commands.
4809
4810@table @code
4811@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4812@cindex input filename symbols
4813@cindex filename symbols
4814@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4815The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4816The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4817file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4818the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4819
4820This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4821normally used for any other object file format.
4822
4823@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4824@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4825@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4826@item CONSTRUCTORS
4827When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4828unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4829destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4830arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4831automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4832For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4833linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4834@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4835ignored for other object file formats.
4836
4837The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4838constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4839Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4840the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4841first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4842of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4843compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4844formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4845@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4846the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4847destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4848@code{exit}.
4849
4850For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4851arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4852addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4853and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4854linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4855runtime code expects to see.
4856
4857@smallexample
4858 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4859 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4860 *(.ctors)
4861 LONG(0)
4862 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4863 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4864 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4865 *(.dtors)
4866 LONG(0)
4867 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4868@end smallexample
4869
4870If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4871which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4872are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4873are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4874command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4875@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4876@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4877@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4878
4879Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4880and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4881need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4882scripts.
4883
4884@end table
4885
4886@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4887@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4888@cindex discarding sections
4889@cindex sections, discarding
4890@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4891The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4892This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4893may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4894@smallexample
49c13adb 4895.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4896@end smallexample
4897@noindent
4898will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4899@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4900sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4901space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4902too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4903space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4904@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4905@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4906This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4907
a0976ea4 4908The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4909on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4910symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4911the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4912section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4913
4914@cindex /DISCARD/
4915The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4916input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4917section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4918
4919@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4920@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4921@cindex output section attributes
4922We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4923like this:
0c71d759 4924
252b5132 4925@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4926@group
7e7d5768 4927@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4928 [AT(@var{lma})]
4929 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4930 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4931 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4932 @{
4933 @var{output-section-command}
4934 @var{output-section-command}
4935 @dots{}
562d3460 4936 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4937@end group
4938@end smallexample
0c71d759 4939
252b5132
RH
4940We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4941@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4942remaining section attributes.
4943
a1ab1d2a 4944@menu
252b5132
RH
4945* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4946* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4947* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4948* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4949* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4950* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4951* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4952* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4953@end menu
4954
4955@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4956@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4957Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4958parentheses. The following types are defined:
4959
4960@table @code
4961@item NOLOAD
4962The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4963loaded into memory when the program is run.
4964@item DSECT
4965@itemx COPY
4966@itemx INFO
4967@itemx OVERLAY
4968These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4969rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4970marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4971section when the program is run.
4972@end table
4973
4974@kindex NOLOAD
4975@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4976@cindex loading, preventing
4977The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4978the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4979the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4980@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4981need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4982@smallexample
4983@group
4984SECTIONS @{
4985 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4986 @dots{}
4987@}
4988@end group
4989@end smallexample
4990
4991@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4992@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4993@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4994@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4995@cindex load address
4996@cindex section load address
4997Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4998@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4999@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5000specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5001address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5002
ea5cae92
NC
5003The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5004specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5005takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5006load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5007region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5008
5009If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5010section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5011load address:
5012
5013@itemize @bullet
5014@item
5015If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5016the LMA address as well.
5017
5018@item
5019If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5020
5021@item
5022Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5023with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5024section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5025VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5026the last section in the located region.
5027
5028@item
5029If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5030that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5031
5032@item
5033If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5034section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5035@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5036
5037@cindex ROM initialized data
5038@cindex initialized data in ROM
5039This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5040example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5041called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5042@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5043even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5044uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5045defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5046counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5047
5048@smallexample
5049@group
5050SECTIONS
5051 @{
5052 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5053 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5054 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5055 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5056 .bss 0x3000 :
5057 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5058@}
5059@end group
5060@end smallexample
5061
5062The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5063this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5064the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5065how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5066script.
5067
5068@smallexample
5069@group
5070extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5071char *src = &_etext;
5072char *dst = &_data;
5073
ea5cae92
NC
5074/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5075while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5076 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5077
ea5cae92 5078/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5079for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5080 *dst = 0;
5081@end group
5082@end smallexample
5083
bbf115d3
L
5084@node Forced Output Alignment
5085@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5086@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5087@cindex forcing output section alignment
5088@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5089You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5090alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5091intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5092
7e7d5768
AM
5093@node Forced Input Alignment
5094@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5095@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5096@cindex forcing input section alignment
5097@cindex input section alignment
5098You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5099SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5100sections, whether larger or smaller.
5101
0c71d759
NC
5102@node Output Section Constraint
5103@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5104@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5105@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5106@cindex constraints on output sections
5107You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5108of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5109read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5110@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5111
252b5132 5112@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5113@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5114@kindex >@var{region}
5115@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5116@cindex memory regions and sections
5117You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5118using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5119
5120Here is a simple example:
5121@smallexample
5122@group
5123MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5124SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5125@end group
5126@end smallexample
5127
5128@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5129@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5130@kindex :@var{phdr}
5131@cindex section, assigning to program header
5132@cindex program headers and sections
5133You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5134using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5135one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5136assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5137@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5138linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5139
5140Here is a simple example:
5141@smallexample
5142@group
5143PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5144SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5145@end group
5146@end smallexample
5147
5148@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5149@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5150@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5151@cindex section fill pattern
5152@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5153You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5154@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5155(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5156within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5157alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5158necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5159of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5160an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5161fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5162other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5163pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5164expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5165
5166You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5167output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5168
5169Here is a simple example:
5170@smallexample
5171@group
563e308f 5172SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5173@end group
5174@end smallexample
5175
5176@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5177@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5178@kindex OVERLAY
5179@cindex overlays
5180An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5181are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5182the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5183copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5184required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5185can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5186than another.
5187
5188Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5189@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5190output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5191command is as follows:
5192@smallexample
5193@group
5194OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5195 @{
5196 @var{secname1}
5197 @{
5198 @var{output-section-command}
5199 @var{output-section-command}
5200 @dots{}
5201 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5202 @var{secname2}
5203 @{
5204 @var{output-section-command}
5205 @var{output-section-command}
5206 @dots{}
5207 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5208 @dots{}
abc9061b 5209 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5210@end group
5211@end smallexample
5212
5213Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5214section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5215section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5216those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5217except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5218sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5219
abc9061b
CC
5220The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5221the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5222
252b5132
RH
5223The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5224addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5225memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5226whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5227and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5228and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5229
56dd11f0
NC
5230If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5231references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5232the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5233sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5234@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5235
5236For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5237provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5238defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5239@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5240the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5241within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5242symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5243
5244At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5245the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5246
5247Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5248@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5249@smallexample
5250@group
5251 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5252 @{
5253 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5254 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5255 @}
5256@end group
5257@end smallexample
5258@noindent
5259This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5260address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5261@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5262following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5263@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5264@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5265
5266C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5267like the following.
5268
5269@smallexample
5270@group
5271 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5272 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5273 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5274@end group
5275@end smallexample
5276
5277Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5278everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5279example could have been written identically as follows.
5280
5281@smallexample
5282@group
5283 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5284 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5285 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5286 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5287 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5288 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5289 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5290@end group
5291@end smallexample
5292
5293@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5294@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5295@kindex MEMORY
5296@cindex memory regions
5297@cindex regions of memory
5298@cindex allocating memory
5299@cindex discontinuous memory
5300The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5301memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5302
5303The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5304memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5305may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5306can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5307set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5308regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5309around to fit into the available regions.
5310
127fcdff
AB
5311A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5312however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5313specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5314@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5315@smallexample
5316@group
a1ab1d2a 5317MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5318 @{
5319 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5320 @dots{}
5321 @}
5322@end group
5323@end smallexample
5324
5325The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5326region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5327Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5328with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5329must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5330add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5331command.
252b5132
RH
5332
5333@cindex memory region attributes
5334The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5335whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5336not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5337@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5338section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5339the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5340them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5341
5342The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5343@table @samp
5344@item R
5345Read-only section
5346@item W
5347Read/write section
5348@item X
5349Executable section
5350@item A
5351Allocatable section
5352@item I
5353Initialized section
5354@item L
5355Same as @samp{I}
5356@item !
c09e9a8c 5357Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5358@end table
5359
5360If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5361@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5362attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5363in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5364attributes.
5365
5366@kindex ORIGIN =
5367@kindex o =
5368@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5369The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5370the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5371cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5372abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5373@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5374
5375@kindex LENGTH =
5376@kindex len =
5377@kindex l =
5378The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5379region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5380be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5381@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5382
5383In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5384available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5385and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5386linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5387is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5388or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5389explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5390region.
5391
5392@smallexample
5393@group
a1ab1d2a 5394MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5395 @{
5396 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5397 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5398 @}
5399@end group
5400@end smallexample
5401
5402Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5403specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5404@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5405a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5406output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5407was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5408the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5409output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5410region, the linker will issue an error message.
5411
3ec57632 5412It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5413expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5414@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5415
5416@smallexample
5417@group
c0065db7 5418 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5419@end group
5420@end smallexample
5421
252b5132
RH
5422@node PHDRS
5423@section PHDRS Command
5424@kindex PHDRS
5425@cindex program headers
5426@cindex ELF program headers
5427@cindex program segments
5428@cindex segments, ELF
5429The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5430@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5431loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5432program with the @samp{-p} option.
5433
5434When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5435reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5436program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5437This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5438interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5439
5440The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5441in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5442precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5443the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5444not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5445
5446The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5447generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5448ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5449
5450This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5451@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5452
5453@smallexample
5454@group
5455PHDRS
5456@{
5457 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5458 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5459@}
5460@end group
5461@end smallexample
5462
5463The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5464of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5465header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5466with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5467must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5468is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5469
5470Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5471system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5472specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5473sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5474attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5475Section Phdr}.
5476
5477It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5478merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5479repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5480contain the section.
5481
5482If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5483then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5484not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5485convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5486placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5487default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5488segment at all.
5489
5490@kindex FILEHDR
5491@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5492You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5493the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5494The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5495file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5496include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5497segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5498these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5499
5500The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5501value of the keyword.
5502
5503@table @asis
5504@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5505Indicates an unused program header.
5506
5507@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5508Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5509the file.
5510
5511@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5512Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5513
5514@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5515Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5516found.
5517
5518@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5519Indicates a segment holding note information.
5520
5521@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5522A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5523ABI.
5524
5525@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5526Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5527
1a9ccd70
NC
5528@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5529Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5530
252b5132
RH
5531@item @var{expression}
5532An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5533be used for types not defined above.
5534@end table
5535
5536You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5537in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5538@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5539Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5540output section attribute.
5541
5542The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5543which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5544explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5545an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5546header.
5547
5548Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5549headers used on a native ELF system.
5550
5551@example
5552@group
5553PHDRS
5554@{
5555 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5556 interp PT_INTERP ;
5557 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5558 data PT_LOAD ;
5559 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5560@}
5561
5562SECTIONS
5563@{
5564 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5565 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5566 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5567 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5568 @dots{}
5569 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5570 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5571 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5572 @dots{}
5573@}
5574@end group
5575@end example
5576
5577@node VERSION
5578@section VERSION Command
5579@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5580@cindex symbol versions
5581@cindex version script
5582@cindex versions of symbols
5583The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5584only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5585symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5586a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5587shared library.
5588
5589You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5590you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5591also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5592
5593The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5594@smallexample
5595VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5596@end smallexample
5597
5598The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5599Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5600version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5601version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5602version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5603scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5604library.
5605
5606The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5607examples.
5608
5609@smallexample
5610VERS_1.1 @{
5611 global:
5612 foo1;
5613 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5614 old*;
5615 original*;
5616 new*;
252b5132
RH
5617@};
5618
5619VERS_1.2 @{
5620 foo2;
5621@} VERS_1.1;
5622
5623VERS_2.0 @{
5624 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5625 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5626 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5627 "f(int, double)";
5628 @};
252b5132
RH
5629@} VERS_1.2;
5630@end smallexample
5631
5632This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5633version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5634The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5635a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5636of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5637symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5638is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5639in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5640However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5641name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5642
5643Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5644depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5645to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5646
5647Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5648depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5649and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5650
5651When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5652specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5653unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5654unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5655somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5656wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5657wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5658set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5659ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5660
5661The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5662they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5663could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5664However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5665
0f6bf451 5666Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5667in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5668symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5669won't.
5670
5671@smallexample
7c9c73be 5672@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5673@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5674
252b5132
RH
5675When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5676symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5677requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5678shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5679loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5680linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5681application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5682way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5683all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5684search for each symbol reference.
5685
5686The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5687doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5688that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5689functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5690the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5691required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5692that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5693versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5694the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5695
5696There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5697first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5698source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5699script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5700maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5701@smallexample
5702__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5703@end smallexample
5704@noindent
5705in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5706be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5707The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5708@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5709takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5710
5711The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5712function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5713an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5714version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5715linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5716
5717To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5718source file. Here is an example:
5719
5720@smallexample
5721__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5722__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5723__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5724__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5725@end smallexample
5726
5727In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5728unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5729example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5730@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5731
5732When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5733some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5734this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5735@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5736declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5737you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5738
5739If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5740within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5741(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5742specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5743
cb840a31
L
5744You can also specify the language in the version script:
5745
5746@smallexample
5747VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5748@end smallexample
5749
c0065db7 5750The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5751The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5752demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5753patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5754@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5755
86043bbb
MM
5756Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5757described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5758or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5759the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5760whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5761cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5762might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5763should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5764expect when you upgrade.
5765
252b5132
RH
5766@node Expressions
5767@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5768@cindex expressions
5769@cindex arithmetic
5770The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5771that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5772expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5773host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5774
5775You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5776
5777The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5778expressions.
5779
5780@menu
5781* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5782* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5783* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5784* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5785* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5786* Operators:: Operators
5787* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5788* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5789* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5790@end menu
5791
5792@node Constants
5793@subsection Constants
5794@cindex integer notation
5795@cindex constants in linker scripts
5796All constants are integers.
5797
5798As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5799octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5800hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5801@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5802@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5803value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5804
5805@cindex scaled integers
5806@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5807@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5808@cindex suffixes for integers
5809@cindex integer suffixes
5810In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5811constant by
5812@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5813@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5814@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5815@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5816@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5817@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5818@tex
5819${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5820@end tex
5821@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5822respectively. For example, the following
5823all refer to the same quantity:
5824
252b5132 5825@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5826_fourk_1 = 4K;
5827_fourk_2 = 4096;
5828_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5829_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5830@end smallexample
5831
8a308ae8
NC
5832Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5833conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5834
0c71d759
NC
5835@node Symbolic Constants
5836@subsection Symbolic Constants
5837@cindex symbolic constants
5838@kindex CONSTANT
5839It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5840the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5841
5842@table @code
5843@item MAXPAGESIZE
5844@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5845The target's maximum page size.
5846
5847@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5848@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5849The target's default page size.
5850@end table
5851
5852So for example:
5853
5854@smallexample
9d5777a3 5855 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5856@end smallexample
5857
5858will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5859supported by the target.
5860
252b5132
RH
5861@node Symbols
5862@subsection Symbol Names
5863@cindex symbol names
5864@cindex names
5865@cindex quoted symbol names
5866@kindex "
5867Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5868and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5869Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5870specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5871keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5872@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5873"SECTION" = 9;
5874"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5875@end smallexample
5876
5877Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5878to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5879whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5880
ecca9871
L
5881@node Orphan Sections
5882@subsection Orphan Sections
5883@cindex orphan
5884Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5885are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5886script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5887output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5888in which to place the orphaned input section.
5889
5890If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5891an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5892placed at the end of that output section.
5893
5894If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5895sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5896name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5897orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5898one new output section.
5899
5900If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5901then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5902in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5903linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5904attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5905sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5906support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5907
a05a5b64
TP
5908The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5909(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5910output sections an orphan is placed in.
5911
252b5132
RH
5912@node Location Counter
5913@subsection The Location Counter
5914@kindex .
5915@cindex dot
5916@cindex location counter
5917@cindex current output location
5918The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5919current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5920location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5921within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5922anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5923
5924@cindex holes
5925Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5926moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5927location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5928and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5929doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5930
5931@smallexample
5932SECTIONS
5933@{
5934 output :
5935 @{
5936 file1(.text)
5937 . = . + 1000;
5938 file2(.text)
5939 . += 1000;
5940 file3(.text)
563e308f 5941 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5942@}
5943@end smallexample
5944@noindent
5945In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5946located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5947followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5948@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5949@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5950specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5951
5c6bbab8
NC
5952@cindex dot inside sections
5953Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5954current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5955statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5956absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5957however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5958not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5959
5960@smallexample
5961SECTIONS
5962@{
5963 . = 0x100
5964 .text: @{
5965 *(.text)
5966 . = 0x200
5967 @}
5968 . = 0x500
5969 .data: @{
5970 *(.data)
5971 . += 0x600
5972 @}
5973@}
5974@end smallexample
5975
5976The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5977and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5978the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5979much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5980move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5981and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5982the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5983the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5984
b5666f2f
AM
5985@cindex dot outside sections
5986Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5987output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5988needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5989
5990@smallexample
5991SECTIONS
5992@{
5993 start_of_text = . ;
5994 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5995 end_of_text = . ;
5996
5997 start_of_data = . ;
5998 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5999 end_of_data = . ;
6000@}
6001@end smallexample
6002
6003If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6004not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6005between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6006should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6007blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6008the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6009sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6010statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6011special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6012place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6013as follows:
6014
6015@smallexample
6016SECTIONS
6017@{
6018 start_of_text = . ;
6019 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6020 end_of_text = . ;
6021
6022 start_of_data = . ;
6023 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6024 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6025 end_of_data = . ;
6026@}
6027@end smallexample
6028
6029This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6030@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6031placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6032assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6033a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6034section. So you could write:
6035
6036@smallexample
6037SECTIONS
6038@{
6039 start_of_text = . ;
6040 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6041 end_of_text = . ;
6042
6043 . = . ;
6044 start_of_data = . ;
6045 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6046 end_of_data = . ;
6047@}
6048@end smallexample
6049
6050Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6051@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6052
252b5132
RH
6053@need 2000
6054@node Operators
6055@subsection Operators
6056@cindex operators for arithmetic
6057@cindex arithmetic operators
6058@cindex precedence in expressions
6059The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6060the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6061@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6062@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6063@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6064@smallexample
6065precedence associativity Operators Notes
6066(highest)
60671 left ! - ~ (1)
60682 left * / %
60693 left + -
60704 left >> <<
60715 left == != > < <= >=
60726 left &
60737 left |
60748 left &&
60759 left ||
607610 right ? :
607711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6078(lowest)
6079@end smallexample
6080Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6081(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6082(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6083@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6084@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6085@tex
6086\vskip \baselineskip
6087%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6088\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6089\hrule
6090\halign
6091{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6092height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6093&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6094height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6095\noalign{\hrule}
6096height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6097&highest&&&&&\cr
6098% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6099&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6100&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6101&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6102&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6103&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6104&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6105&7&&left&&|&\cr
6106&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6107&9&&left&&||&\cr
6108&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6109&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6110&lowest&&&&&\cr
6111height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6112\hrule}
6113@end tex
6114@iftex
6115{
6116@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6117@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6118@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6119}
6120@end iftex
6121@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6122
6123@node Evaluation
6124@subsection Evaluation
6125@cindex lazy evaluation
6126@cindex expression evaluation order
6127The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6128an expression when absolutely necessary.
6129
6130The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6131address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6132regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6133as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6134
6135However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6136until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6137other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6138for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6139
6140The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6141assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6142allocation.
6143
6144Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6145@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6146
6147If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6148available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6149following
6150@smallexample
6151@group
6152SECTIONS
6153 @{
a1ab1d2a 6154 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6155 @{ *(.text) @}
6156 @}
6157@end group
6158@end smallexample
6159@noindent
6160will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6161address}.
6162
6163@node Expression Section
6164@subsection The Section of an Expression
6165@cindex expression sections
6166@cindex absolute expressions
6167@cindex relative expressions
6168@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6169@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6170@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6171Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6172relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6173using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6174value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6175symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6176operations.
6177
abf4be64
AM
6178Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6179section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6180address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6181@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6182functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6183One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6184(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6185differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6186versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6187section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6188Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6189absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6190given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6191everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6192
6193In the following simple example,
252b5132 6194
7542af2a
AM
6195@smallexample
6196@group
6197SECTIONS
6198 @{
6199 . = 0x100;
6200 __executable_start = 0x100;
6201 .data :
6202 @{
6203 . = 0x10;
6204 __data_start = 0x10;
6205 *(.data)
6206 @}
6207 @dots{}
6208 @}
6209@end group
6210@end smallexample
252b5132 6211
7542af2a
AM
6212both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6213address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6214@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6215section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6216
5c3049d2
AM
6217For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6218addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6219
6220@itemize @bullet
6221@item
c05f749e
AM
6222Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6223operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6224absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6225@item
7542af2a
AM
6226Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6227relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6228and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6229@item
c05f749e
AM
6230Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6231in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6232address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6233before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6234@end itemize
6235
6236The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6237
6238@itemize @bullet
6239@item
6240An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6241@item
6242The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6243@item
9bc8bb33 6244The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6245relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6246(after above conversions) is also a number when
6247@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6248but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6249@item
6250The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6251relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6252section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6253@item
6254The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6255conversions) is an absolute address.
6256@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6257
6258You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6259to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6260create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6261section @samp{.data}:
6262@smallexample
6263SECTIONS
6264 @{
6265 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6266 @}
6267@end smallexample
6268@noindent
6269If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6270@samp{.data} section.
6271
7542af2a
AM
6272Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6273particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6274
252b5132
RH
6275@node Builtin Functions
6276@subsection Builtin Functions
6277@cindex functions in expressions
6278The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6279use in linker script expressions.
6280
6281@table @code
6282@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6283@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6284@cindex expression, absolute
6285Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6286of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6287value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6288normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6289
6290@item ADDR(@var{section})
6291@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6292@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6293Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6294script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6295the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6296@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6297@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6298the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6299@smallexample
6300@group
6301SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6302 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6303 @{
252b5132
RH
6304 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6305 @dots{}
6306 @}
6307 .output :
6308 @{
6309 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6310 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6311 @}
6312@dots{} @}
6313@end group
6314@end smallexample
6315
876f4090
NS
6316@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6317@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6318@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6319@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6320@cindex round up location counter
6321@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6322@cindex round up expression
6323@cindex align expression
6324Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6325to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6326doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6327arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6328expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6329equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6330
6331Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6332next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6333variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6334input sections:
252b5132
RH
6335@smallexample
6336@group
6337SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6338 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6339 *(.data)
6340 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6341 @}
6342@dots{} @}
6343@end group
6344@end smallexample
6345@noindent
6346The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6347a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6348a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6349of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6350
6351The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6352
362c1d1a
NS
6353@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6354@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6355@cindex section alignment
6356Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6357been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6358evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6359the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6360value in that section.
6361@smallexample
6362@group
6363SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6364 .output @{
6365 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6366 @dots{}
6367 @}
6368@dots{} @}
6369@end group
6370@end smallexample
6371
252b5132
RH
6372@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6373@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6374This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6375scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6376section.
6377
2d20f7bf
JJ
6378@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6379@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6380This is equivalent to either
6381@smallexample
6382(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6383@end smallexample
6384or
6385@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6386(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6387 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6388@end smallexample
6389@noindent
6390depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6391for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6392@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6393If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6394memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6395bytes in the on-disk file.
6396
6397This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6398any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6399@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6400be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6401running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6402that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6403page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6404
6405@noindent
6406Example:
6407@smallexample
6408 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6409@end smallexample
6410
6411@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6412@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6413This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6414evaluation purposes.
6415
6416@smallexample
6417 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6418@end smallexample
6419
a4f5ad88
JJ
6420@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6421@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6422This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6423@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6424When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6425does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6426@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6427argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6428script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6429@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6430padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6431section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6432
6433@smallexample
6434 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6435@end smallexample
6436
252b5132
RH
6437@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6438@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6439@cindex symbol defaults
6440Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6441defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6442return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6443default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6444shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6445the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6446existed, its value is preserved:
6447
6448@smallexample
6449@group
6450SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6451 .text : @{
6452 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6453 @dots{}
6454 @}
6455 @dots{}
6456@}
6457@end group
6458@end smallexample
6459
3ec57632
NC
6460@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6461@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6462Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6463
252b5132
RH
6464@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6465@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6466@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6467Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6468Section LMA}).
6469
2e53f7d6
NC
6470@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6471@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6472Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6473@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6474
252b5132
RH
6475@kindex MAX
6476@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6477Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6478
6479@kindex MIN
6480@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6481Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6482
6483@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6484@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6485@cindex unallocated address, next
6486Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6487This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6488use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6489output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6490
3ec57632
NC
6491@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6492@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6493Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6494
ba916c8a
MM
6495@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6496@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6497Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6498value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6499@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6500will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6501can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6502``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6503name.
6504
252b5132
RH
6505@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6506@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6507@cindex section size
6508Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6509been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6510evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6511@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6512@smallexample
6513@group
6514SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6515 .output @{
6516 .start = . ;
6517 @dots{}
6518 .end = . ;
6519 @}
6520 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6521 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6522@dots{} @}
6523@end group
6524@end smallexample
6525
6526@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6527@itemx sizeof_headers
6528@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6529@cindex header size
6530Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6531information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6532this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6533choose, to facilitate paging.
6534
6535@cindex not enough room for program headers
6536@cindex program headers, not enough room
6537When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6538@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6539number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6540addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6541additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6542room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6543the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6544script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6545you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6546command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6547@end table
6548
6549@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6550@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6551@cindex implicit linker scripts
6552If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6553an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6554linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6555linker will report an error.
6556
6557An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6558
6559Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6560assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6561commands.
6562
6563Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6564at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6565read. This can affect archive searching.
6566
6567@ifset GENERIC
6568@node Machine Dependent
6569@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6570
6571@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6572@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6573sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6574functionality are not listed.
6575
6576@menu
36f63dca
NC
6577@ifset H8300
6578* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6579@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6580@ifset M68HC11
6581* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6582@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6583@ifset ARM
6584* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6585@end ifset
6586@ifset HPPA
6587* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6588@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6589@ifset M68K
6590* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6591@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6592@ifset MIPS
6593* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6594@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6595@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6596* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6597@end ifset
2469cfa2 6598@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6599* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6600@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6601@ifset NDS32
6602* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6603@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6604@ifset NIOSII
6605* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6606@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6607@ifset POWERPC
6608* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6609@end ifset
6610@ifset POWERPC64
6611* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6612@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6613@ifset S/390
6614* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6615@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6616@ifset SPU
6617* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6618@end ifset
74459f0e 6619@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6620* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6621@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6622@ifset WIN32
6623* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6624@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6625@ifset XTENSA
6626* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6627@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6628@end menu
6629@end ifset
6630
252b5132
RH
6631@ifset H8300
6632@ifclear GENERIC
6633@raisesections
6634@end ifclear
6635
6636@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6637@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6638
6639@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6640For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6641you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6642
6643@table @emph
6644@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6645@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6646@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6647targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6648program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6649respectively.
6650
6651@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6652@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6653@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6654@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6655sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6656page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6657(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6658@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6659top page of memory).
1502569c 6660
81f5558e
NC
6661@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6662indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6663displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6664the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6665@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6666whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6667range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6668
1502569c 6669@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6670@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6671biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6672which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6673page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6674(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6675@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6676the top page of memory).
6677
6678@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6679@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
668032 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6681changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6682(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6683@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6684the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6685@end table
6686
6687@ifclear GENERIC
6688@lowersections
6689@end ifclear
6690@end ifset
6691
36f63dca 6692@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6693@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6694@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6695@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6696@node Renesas
6697@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6698
c2dcd04e
NC
6699@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6700H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6701options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6702@end ifset
6703@end ifclear
6704
36f63dca
NC
6705@ifset ARM
6706@ifclear GENERIC
6707@raisesections
6708@end ifclear
6709
93fd0973
SC
6710@ifset M68HC11
6711@ifclear GENERIC
6712@raisesections
6713@end ifclear
6714
6715@node M68HC11/68HC12
6716@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6717
6718@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6719
6720@subsection Linker Relaxation
6721
6722For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6723optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6724
6725@table @emph
6726@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6727@item relaxing address modes
6728@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6729targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6730program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6731respectively.
6732
6733@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6734transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6735page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6736
6737@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6738When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6739of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6740addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6741@code{bset} instructions.
6742
6743@end table
6744
6745@subsection Trampoline Generation
6746
6747@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6748@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6749For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6750call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6751will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6752trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6753case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6754point to the function trampoline.
6755
6756@ifclear GENERIC
6757@lowersections
6758@end ifclear
6759@end ifset
6760
36f63dca 6761@node ARM
3674e28a 6762@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6763
6764@cindex ARM interworking support
6765@kindex --support-old-code
6766For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6767between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6768been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6769line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6770libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6771option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6772given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6773which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6774the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6775non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6776
6777@cindex thumb entry point
6778@cindex entry point, thumb
6779@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6780The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6781@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6782But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6783branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6784executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6785
ce11ba6c
KT
6786@cindex PE import table prefixing
6787@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6788The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6789the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6790element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6791import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6792
e489d0ae
PB
6793@cindex BE8
6794@kindex --be8
6795The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6796executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6797objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6798option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6799little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6800
3674e28a
PB
6801@cindex TARGET1
6802@kindex --target1-rel
6803@kindex --target1-abs
6804The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6805@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6806or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6807and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6808
6809@cindex TARGET2
6810@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6811The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6812@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6813meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6814@table @samp
6815@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6816@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6817@item abs
6818@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6819@item got-rel
6820@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6821@end table
6822
319850b4
JB
6823@cindex FIX_V4BX
6824@kindex --fix-v4bx
6825The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6826specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6827interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6828also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6829
6830In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6831linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6832@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6833
6834In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6835relocations are ignored.
6836
845b51d6
PB
6837@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6838@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6839Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6840relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6841
6842@smallexample
6843TST rM, #1
6844MOVEQ PC, rM
6845BX Rn
6846@end smallexample
6847
6848This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6849and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6850condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6851
33bfe774
JB
6852@cindex USE_BLX
6853@kindex --use-blx
6854The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6855BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6856situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6857code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6858each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6859
6860This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6861specify it if you are using that target.
6862
c6dd86c6
JB
6863@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6864@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6865The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6866bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6867instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6868to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6869the support code can read the intended values.
6870
6871The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6872intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6873and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6874intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6875full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6876you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6877
6878If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6879enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6880@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6881mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6882vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6883@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6884
6885If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6886potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6887such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6888first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6889instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6890the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6891are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6892
2de70689
MGD
6893@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6894@kindex --fix-arm1176
6895@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6896The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6897in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6898are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6899unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6900
9d5777a3 6901Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6902Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6903http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6904
a504d23a
LA
6905@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6906@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6907
6908The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6909workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6910the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6911off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6912the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6913core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6914integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6915VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6916
6917The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6918necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6919
6920The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6921@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6922STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6923linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6924@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6925
6926If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6927potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6928such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6929replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6930branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6931then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6932
6933The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6934the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6935
6936The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6937they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6938there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6939occurs.
6940
6941The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6942PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6943large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6944cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6945occurs.
6946
bf21ed78
MS
6947@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6948@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6949The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6950warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6951enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6952linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6953using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6954not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6955
6956@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6957@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6958The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6959warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6960@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6961linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6962using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6963
726150b7
NC
6964@cindex PIC_VENEER
6965@kindex --pic-veneer
6966The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6967ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6968is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6969@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6970
6971@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6972@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6973The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6974code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6975perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6976placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 6977controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 6978The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6979duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6980group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6981code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6982where they should be placed.
6983
6984The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6985@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6986placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6987branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6988placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6989value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6990exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6991A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6992linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6993from the input sections.
6994
6995The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6996@samp{N = +1}.
6997
1a51c1a4
NC
6998Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6999only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7000otherwise.
7001
1db37fe6
YG
7002@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7003@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7004@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7005The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7006
7007The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7008
68fcca92
JW
7009@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7010@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7011@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7012The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7013
7014Please contact ARM for further details.
7015
1db37fe6
YG
7016@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7017@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7018@cindex Merging exidx entries
7019The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7020
7021@kindex --long-plt
7022@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7023The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7024which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7025entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7026
1f56df9d
JW
7027@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7028@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7029The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7030link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7031
4ba2ef8f
TP
7032@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7033All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7034Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7035@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7036veneers in memory.
7037
54ddd295
TP
7038@kindex --cmse-implib
7039@cindex Secure gateway import library
7040The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7041specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7042secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7043executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7044
0955507f
TP
7045@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7046@cindex Input import library
7047The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7048must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7049given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7050in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7051@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7052library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7053library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7054for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7055specified.
7056
36f63dca
NC
7057@ifclear GENERIC
7058@lowersections
7059@end ifclear
7060@end ifset
7061
7062@ifset HPPA
7063@ifclear GENERIC
7064@raisesections
7065@end ifclear
7066
7067@node HPPA ELF32
7068@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7069@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7070@kindex --multi-subspace
7071When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7072import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7073The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7074stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7075multiple sub-spaces.
7076
7077@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7078@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7079Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7080stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7081@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7082sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7083a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7084the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7085conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7086prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7087A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7088branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7089@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7090@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7091detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7092positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7093
7094Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7095single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7096create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7097large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7098
7099@ifclear GENERIC
7100@lowersections
7101@end ifclear
7102@end ifset
7103
7fb9f789
NC
7104@ifset M68K
7105@ifclear GENERIC
7106@raisesections
7107@end ifclear
7108
7109@node M68K
7110@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7111
7112@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7113@kindex --got=@var{type}
7114The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7115The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7116@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7117the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7118@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7119entries only at non-negative offsets.
7120@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7121entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7122support such GOTs.
7123@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7124output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7125file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7126files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7127
7128@ifclear GENERIC
7129@lowersections
7130@end ifclear
7131@end ifset
7132
833794fc
MR
7133@ifset MIPS
7134@ifclear GENERIC
7135@raisesections
7136@end ifclear
7137
7138@node MIPS
7139@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7140
7141@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7142@kindex --insn32
7143@kindex --no-insn32
7144The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7145microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7146in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7147used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7148or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7149including 16-bit ones where possible.
7150
8b10b0b3
MR
7151@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7152@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7153@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7154The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7155control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7156@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7157relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7158calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7159relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7160instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7161or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7162the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7163
833794fc
MR
7164@ifclear GENERIC
7165@lowersections
7166@end ifclear
7167@end ifset
7168
36f63dca
NC
7169@ifset MMIX
7170@ifclear GENERIC
7171@raisesections
7172@end ifclear
7173
7174@node MMIX
7175@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7176For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7177@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7178understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7179can translate between the two formats.
7180
7181There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7182Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7183registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7184equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7185@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7186global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7187this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7188symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7189
7a2de473
HPN
7190Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7191@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7192The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7193of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7194
7195Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7196are left out from an mmo file.
7197
7198@ifclear GENERIC
7199@lowersections
7200@end ifclear
7201@end ifset
7202
7203@ifset MSP430
7204@ifclear GENERIC
7205@raisesections
7206@end ifclear
7207
7208@node MSP430
7209@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7210For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7211will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7212just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7213
7214@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7215The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7216
7217@table @code
7218@item @samp{.vectors}
7219Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7220
7221@item @samp{.bootloader}
7222Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7223in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7224
7225@item @samp{.infomem}
7226Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7227this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7228
c0065db7 7229@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7230This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7231in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7232
7233@item @samp{.noinit}
7234Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7235
c0065db7 7236The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7237@end table
7238
7ef3addb
JL
7239@table @option
7240@cindex MSP430 Options
7241@kindex --code-region
7242@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7243This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7244argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7245using this option.
7246
7247@kindex --data-region
7248@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7249This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7250[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7251for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7252
7253@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7254@item --disable-sec-transformation
7255Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7256and @code{--data-region} options.
7257This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7258wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7259not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7260@end table
7261
36f63dca
NC
7262@ifclear GENERIC
7263@lowersections
7264@end ifclear
7265@end ifset
7266
35c08157
KLC
7267@ifset NDS32
7268@ifclear GENERIC
7269@raisesections
7270@end ifclear
7271
7272@node NDS32
7273@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7274@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7275For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7276relaxes objects according to these options.
7277
7278@table @code
7279@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7280Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7281
7282@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7283Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7284
7285@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7286Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7287
7288@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7289Export the EX9 table after linking.
7290
7291@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7292Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7293
7294@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7295Update the existing EX9 table.
7296
7297@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7298Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7299
7300@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7301Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7302
7303@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7304Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7305
7306@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7307Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7308@end table
7309
7310@ifclear GENERIC
7311@lowersections
7312@end ifclear
7313@end ifset
7314
78058a5e
SL
7315@ifset NIOSII
7316@ifclear GENERIC
7317@raisesections
7318@end ifclear
7319
7320@node Nios II
7321@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7322@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7323@kindex --relax on Nios II
7324
7325Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7326transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7327which may result in @command{ld} giving
7328@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7329The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7330trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7331outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7332trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7333be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7334larger than 256MB.
7335
7336The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7337is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7338@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7339locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7340source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7341register as a temporary.
7342
7343Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7344relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7345option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7346
7347@ifclear GENERIC
7348@lowersections
7349@end ifclear
7350@end ifset
7351
2a60a7a8
AM
7352@ifset POWERPC
7353@ifclear GENERIC
7354@raisesections
7355@end ifclear
7356
7357@node PowerPC ELF32
7358@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7359@cindex PowerPC long branches
7360@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7361Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7362displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7363@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7364@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7365the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7366section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7367section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7368@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7369both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7370considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7371
7372@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7373@table @option
7374@cindex PowerPC PLT
7375@kindex --bss-plt
7376@item --bss-plt
7377Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7378generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7379the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7380writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7381@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7382PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7383compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7384BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7385
016687f8
AM
7386@kindex --secure-plt
7387@item --secure-plt
7388@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7389@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7390when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7391layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7392style BSS PLT.
7393
2a60a7a8
AM
7394@cindex PowerPC GOT
7395@kindex --sdata-got
7396@item --sdata-got
7397The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7398sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7399@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7400section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7401@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7402@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7403@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7404@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7405PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7406pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7407GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7408really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7409
7410@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7411@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7412@item --emit-stub-syms
7413This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7414symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7415
7416@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7417@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7418@item --no-tls-optimize
7419PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7420sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7421disable the optimization.
7422@end table
7423
7424@ifclear GENERIC
7425@lowersections
7426@end ifclear
7427@end ifset
7428
7429@ifset POWERPC64
7430@ifclear GENERIC
7431@raisesections
7432@end ifclear
7433
7434@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7435@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7436
7437@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7438@table @option
7439@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7440@kindex --stub-group-size
7441@item --stub-group-size
7442Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7443by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7444@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7445sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7446a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7447the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7448conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7449prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7450A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7451branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7452@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7453@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7454detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7455positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7456
7457Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7458single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7459create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7460large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7461
7462@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7463@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7464@item --emit-stub-syms
7465This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7466symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7467
7468@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7469@kindex --dotsyms
7470@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7471@item --dotsyms
7472@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7473These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7474in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7475function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7476code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7477properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7478to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7479@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7480dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7481feature.
7482
7ae4ea7d
AM
7483@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7484@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7485@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7486@item --save-restore-funcs
7487@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7488These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7489provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7490@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7491function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7492link.
7493
2a60a7a8
AM
7494@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7495@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7496@item --no-tls-optimize
7497PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7498sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7499disable the optimization.
7500
7c9cf415
AM
7501@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7502@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7503@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7504@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7505@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7506These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7507stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7508an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7509@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7510stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7511option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7512Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7513slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7514application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7515normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7516
2a60a7a8
AM
7517@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7518@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7519@item --no-opd-optimize
7520PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7521corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7522the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7523Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7524
7525@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7526@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7527@item --non-overlapping-opd
7528Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7529@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7530the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7531entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7532
7533@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7534@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7535@item --no-toc-optimize
7536PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7537entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7538reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7539marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7540marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7541relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7542unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7543reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7544discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7545reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7546code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7547optimization.
7548
7549@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7550@kindex --no-multi-toc
7551@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7552If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7553@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7554where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7555entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7556total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7557grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7558TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7559calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7560help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
756164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7562Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7563
7564@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7565@kindex --no-toc-sort
7566@item --no-toc-sort
7567By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7568happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7569placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7570with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7571referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7572@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7573results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7574off this feature.
7575
7576@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7577@kindex --plt-align
7578@kindex --no-plt-align
7579@item --plt-align
7580@itemx --no-plt-align
7581Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7582aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7583boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7584specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7585specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7586if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7587PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7588
7589@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7590@kindex --plt-static-chain
7591@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7592@item --plt-static-chain
7593@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7594Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7595chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7596chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7597
7598@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7599@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7600@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7601@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7602@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7603With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7604lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7605another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7606order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7607memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7608barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7609looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7610seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7611default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7612
7613@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7614@kindex --plt-localentry
7615@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7616@item --plt-localentry
7617@itemx --no-localentry
7618ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7619ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7620(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7621Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7622or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7623functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7624in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7625interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7626including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7627to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7628complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7629care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7630@end table
7631
7632@ifclear GENERIC
7633@lowersections
7634@end ifclear
7635@end ifset
7636
b4cbbe8f
AK
7637@ifset S/390
7638@ifclear GENERIC
7639@raisesections
7640@end ifclear
7641
7642@node S/390 ELF
7643@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7644
7645@cindex S/390 ELF options
7646@table @option
7647
7648@cindex S/390
7649@kindex --s390-pgste
7650@item --s390-pgste
7651This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7652segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7653binaries marked that way.
7654@end table
7655
7656@ifclear GENERIC
7657@lowersections
7658@end ifclear
7659@end ifset
7660
49fa1e15
AM
7661@ifset SPU
7662@ifclear GENERIC
7663@raisesections
7664@end ifclear
7665
7666@node SPU ELF
7667@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7668
7669@cindex SPU ELF options
7670@table @option
7671
7672@cindex SPU plugins
7673@kindex --plugin
7674@item --plugin
7675This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7676
7677@cindex SPU overlays
7678@kindex --no-overlays
7679@item --no-overlays
7680Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7681regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7682@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7683turns off all this special overlay handling.
7684
7685@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7686@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7687@item --emit-stub-syms
7688This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7689symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7690
7691@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7692@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7693@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7694This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7695function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7696on calls to non-overlay regions.
7697
7698@cindex SPU local store size
7699@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7700@item --local-store=lo:hi
7701@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7702the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7703range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7704
c0065db7 7705@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7706@kindex --stack-analysis
7707@item --stack-analysis
7708SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7709unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7710under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7711@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7712@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7713determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7714for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7715for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7716for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7717find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7718and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7719under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7720dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7721is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7722and calls will be given.
7723
c0065db7 7724@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7725@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7726@item --emit-stack-syms
7727This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7728in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7729These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7730functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7731functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7732such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7733The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7734@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7735@end table
7736
7737@ifclear GENERIC
7738@lowersections
7739@end ifclear
7740@end ifset
7741
36f63dca
NC
7742@ifset TICOFF
7743@ifclear GENERIC
7744@raisesections
7745@end ifclear
7746
7747@node TI COFF
7748@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7749@cindex TI COFF versions
7750@kindex --format=@var{version}
7751The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7752TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7753also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7754format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7755header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7756
7757@ifclear GENERIC
7758@lowersections
7759@end ifclear
7760@end ifset
7761
2ca22b03
NC
7762@ifset WIN32
7763@ifclear GENERIC
7764@raisesections
7765@end ifclear
7766
7767@node WIN32
7768@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7769
c0065db7 7770This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7771See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7772command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7773
7774@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7775@cindex import libraries
7776@item import libraries
69da35b5 7777The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7778libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7779regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7780archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7781support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7782@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7783
c0065db7
RM
7784@item exporting DLL symbols
7785@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7786The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7787
7788@table @emph
7789@item using auto-export functionality
7790@cindex using auto-export functionality
7791By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7792which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7793
0a5d968e
NC
7794@itemize
7795@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7796@item --exclude-symbols
7797@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7798@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7799@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7800@end itemize
7801
09e2aba4
DK
7802When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7803(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7804symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7805often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7806private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7807options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7808exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7809final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7810
7811If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7812command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7813if either of the following are true:
7814
7815@itemize
7816@item A DEF file is used.
7817@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7818@end itemize
dc8465bf 7819
c0065db7
RM
7820@item using a DEF file
7821@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7822Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7823an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7824exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7825name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7826command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7827
7828@example
7829gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7830@end example
7831
0a5d968e
NC
7832Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7833@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7834
dc8465bf
NC
7835Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7836
7837@example
4b5bd4e7 7838LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7839
7840EXPORTS
7841foo
7842bar
7843_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7844another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7845var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7846doo = foo == foo2
7847eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7848@end example
dc8465bf 7849
7fcab871 7850This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7851symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7852alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7853by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7854@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7855@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7856export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7857in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7858symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7859
6b31ad16
DS
7860The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7861name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7862the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7863
b45619c0
NC
7864When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7865library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7866@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7867executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7868
7869With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7870specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7871non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7872
7873If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7874or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7875filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7876
4b5bd4e7
DS
7877The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7878
7879@example
7880EXPORTS
7881 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7882 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7883 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7884@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7885
7886Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7887@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7888@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7889@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7890Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7891@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7892string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7893
7894The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7895
7896@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7897will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7898by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7899linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7900library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7901
7902@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7903The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7904the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7905@code{*_imp__foo}).
7906
7907@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7908well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7909read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7910variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7911the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7912extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7913application will behave unexpectedly.
7914
7915@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7916it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7917symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7918API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7919the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7920
4b5bd4e7
DS
7921See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7922other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7923
7924@cindex creating a DEF file
7925While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 7926with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7927
7928@item Using decorations
7929@cindex Using decorations
7930Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7931itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7932declared as:
7933
7934@example
7935__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7936__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7937@end example
7938
7939All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7940any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7941this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7942the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7943
7944Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7945decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7946instead:
7947
7948@example
7949__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7950__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7951@end example
7952
c0065db7
RM
7953This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7954when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7955variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7956code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7957of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7958omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7959@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7960information.
c0065db7 7961@end table
dc8465bf 7962
2ca22b03
NC
7963@cindex automatic data imports
7964@item automatic data imports
7965The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7966by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7967compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7968issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7969code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7970c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7971initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7972decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7973platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7974command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7975The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7976suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7977trigger the feature's use.
7978
c0065db7 7979auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7980additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7981
c0065db7 7982"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7983documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7984
c0065db7
RM
7985The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7986occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7987One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7988below.
7989
7990@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7991For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7992object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7993offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7994field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7995in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7996without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7997The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7998references.
7999
c0065db7
RM
8000The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8001be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8002themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8003runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8004compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8005support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8006run without error on an older system.
8007
c0065db7
RM
8008@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8009enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8010
8011@cindex direct linking to a dll
8012@item direct linking to a dll
8013The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8014including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8015libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8016traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8017libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8018function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8019though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8020storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8021tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8022large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8023
c0065db7 8024Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8025@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8026of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8027perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8028select the dll instead of an import library.
8029
2ca22b03 8030
69da35b5
NC
8031For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8032to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8033
8034@example
45e948fe
NC
8035libxxx.dll.a
8036xxx.dll.a
8037libxxx.a
8038xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8039libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8040cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8041libxxx.dll
8042xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8043@end example
8044
69da35b5
NC
8045before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8046
c0065db7
RM
8047(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8048where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8049@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8050file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8051@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8052
c0065db7
RM
8053Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8054@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8055was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8056various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8057could coexist on the same machine.
8058
2ca22b03
NC
8059The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8060applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8061libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8062
8063@example
8064bin/
8065 cygxxx.dll
8066lib/
8067 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8068 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8069@end example
8070
c0065db7
RM
8071Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8072done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8073
80741. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8075@example
8076gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8077@end example
2ca22b03 8078
69da35b5
NC
8079However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8080(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8081@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8082not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8083
2ca22b03
NC
80842. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8085directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8086should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8087making the app/dll.
8088
8089@example
8090ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8091@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8092
8093Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8094
8095@example
8096gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8097@end example
69da35b5
NC
8098
8099This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8100perfectly legal
8101
8102@example
8103bin/
8104 cygxxx-5.dll
8105lib/
c0065db7 8106 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8107@end example
8108
dc8465bf 8109Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8110even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8111@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8112
8113Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8114wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8115
81161. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8117work with auto-imported data.
8118
dc8465bf
NC
81192. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8120import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8121symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8122for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8123possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8124
45e948fe
NC
81253. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8126critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8127in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8128stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8129
69da35b5 8130So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8131true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8132a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8133binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8134massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8135requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8136will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8137
c0065db7 8138@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8139@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8140@item adding additional names
8141Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8142A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8143exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8144when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8145import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8146
c0065db7 8147@example
dc8465bf
NC
8148LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8149
8150EXPORTS
c0065db7 8151foo
dc8465bf 8152_foo = foo
c0065db7 8153@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8154
8155The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8156
8157Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8158source code using the "weak" attribute:
8159
c0065db7
RM
8160@example
8161void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8162void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8163@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8164
8165See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8166symbols.
8167
8168@item renaming symbols
8169Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8170kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8171@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8172DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8173created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8174
c0065db7 8175@example
dc8465bf
NC
8176LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8177
8178EXPORTS
8179_foo = foo
c0065db7 8180@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8181
8182The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8183@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8184@end table
dc8465bf 8185
0a5d968e 8186Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8187unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8188If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8189@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8190that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8191@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8192renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8193to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8194the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8195In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8196which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8197
8198@cindex weak externals
8199@item weak externals
8200The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8201weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8202defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8203are three variants of weak externals:
8204@itemize
8205@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8206called lazy externals.
8207@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8208This form is not presently implemented.
8209@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8210implemented.
8211@end itemize
8212As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8213are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8214uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8215
8216@cindex aligned common symbols
8217@item aligned common symbols
8218As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8219desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8220the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8221carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8222by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8223tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8224but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8225warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8226
2ca22b03
NC
8227@end table
8228
8229@ifclear GENERIC
8230@lowersections
8231@end ifclear
8232@end ifset
8233
e0001a05
NC
8234@ifset XTENSA
8235@ifclear GENERIC
8236@raisesections
8237@end ifclear
8238
8239@node Xtensa
8240@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8241
8242@cindex Xtensa processors
8243The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8244@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8245specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8246keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8247example, with the command:
8248
8249@smallexample
8250SECTIONS
8251@{
8252 .text : @{
8253 *(.literal .text)
8254 @}
8255@}
8256@end smallexample
8257
8258@noindent
8259@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8260and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8261literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8262interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8263group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8264files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8265and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8266
43cd72b9 8267@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8268@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8269Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8270provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8271is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8272literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8273will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8274location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8275the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8276unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8277@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8278range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8279
8280For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8281to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8282instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8283instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8284instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8285@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8286hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8287By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8288switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8289density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8290instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8291performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8292linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8293a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8294
8295The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8296control the linker:
8297
8298@cindex Xtensa options
8299@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8300@item --size-opt
8301When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8302more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8303no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8304alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8305preserve the correctness of the code.
8306@end table
e0001a05
NC
8307
8308@ifclear GENERIC
8309@lowersections
8310@end ifclear
8311@end ifset
8312
252b5132
RH
8313@ifclear SingleFormat
8314@node BFD
8315@chapter BFD
8316
8317@cindex back end
8318@cindex object file management
8319@cindex object formats available
8320@kindex objdump -i
8321The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8322These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8323object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8324format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8325it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8326associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8327object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8328(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8329list all the formats available for your configuration.
8330
8331@cindex BFD requirements
8332@cindex requirements for BFD
8333As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8334several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8335BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8336formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8337been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8338BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8339may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8340
8341One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8342mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8343useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8344conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8345
8346@menu
8347* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8348@end menu
8349
8350@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8351@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8352@cindex opening object files
8353@include bfdsumm.texi
8354@end ifclear
8355
8356@node Reporting Bugs
8357@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8358@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8359@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8360
ff5dcc92 8361Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8362
8363Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8364it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8365to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8366work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8367@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8368
8369In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8370information that enables us to fix the bug.
8371
8372@menu
8373* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8374* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8375@end menu
8376
8377@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8378@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8379@cindex bug criteria
8380
8381If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8382
8383@itemize @bullet
8384@cindex fatal signal
8385@cindex linker crash
8386@cindex crash of linker
8387@item
8388If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8389@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8390
8391@cindex error on valid input
8392@item
ff5dcc92 8393If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8394
8395@cindex invalid input
8396@item
ff5dcc92 8397If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8398may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8399object files are correct.
8400
8401@item
8402If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8403improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8404@end itemize
8405
8406@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8407@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8408@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8409@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8410
8411A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8412products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8413recommend you contact that organization first.
8414
8415You can find contact information for many support companies and
8416individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8417distribution.
8418
ad22bfe8 8419@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8420Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8421@value{BUGURL}.
8422@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8423
8424The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8425@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8426fact or leave it out, state it!
8427
8428Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8429problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8430assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8431matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8432the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8433location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8434were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8435into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8436specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8437and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8438
8439Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8440the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8441on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8442
8443Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8444bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8445respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8446You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8447
8448To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8449
8450@itemize @bullet
8451@item
ff5dcc92 8452The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8453the @samp{--version} argument.
8454
8455Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8456the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8457
8458@item
ff5dcc92 8459Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8460patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8461
8462@item
8463The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8464version number.
8465
8466@item
ff5dcc92 8467What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8468``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8469
8470@item
8471The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8472observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8473list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8474sufficient.
8475
8476If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8477and then we might not encounter the bug.
8478
8479@item
8480A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8481bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8482provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8483bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8484state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8485requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8486we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8487attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8488
8489If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8490@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8491object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8492@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8493how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8494
8495@item
8496A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8497incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8498
ff5dcc92 8499Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8500will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8501not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8502a chance to make a mistake.
8503
8504Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8505say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8506copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8507C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8508and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8509fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8510you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8511any conclusion from our observations.
8512
8513@item
ff5dcc92 8514If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8515diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8516@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8517If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8518context, not by line number.
8519
8520The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8521sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8522@end itemize
8523
8524Here are some things that are not necessary:
8525
8526@itemize @bullet
8527@item
8528A description of the envelope of the bug.
8529
8530Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8531which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8532changes will not affect it.
8533
8534This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8535will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8536with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8537We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8538
8539Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8540of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8541output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8542less time, and so on.
8543
8544However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8545report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8546
8547@item
8548A patch for the bug.
8549
8550A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8551the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8552a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8553to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8554
ff5dcc92 8555Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8556construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8557through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8558able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8559fixed.
8560
8561And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8562patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8563help us to understand.
8564
8565@item
8566A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8567
8568Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8569things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8570@end itemize
8571
8572@node MRI
8573@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8574@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8575To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8576linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8577alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8578described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8579simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8580@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8581linker commands; these commands are described here.
8582
8583In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8584file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8585features to make use of them.
8586
8587You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8588@samp{-c} command-line option.
8589
8590Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8591command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8592blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8593MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8594issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8595
8596Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8597
8598You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8599lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8600The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8601
8602@table @code
8603@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8604@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8605@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8606Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8607the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8608@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8609your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8610script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8611commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8612input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8613@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8614
8615@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8616@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8617Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8618in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8619
8620@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8621
8622@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8623@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8624Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8625@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8626
8627@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8628@item BASE @var{expression}
8629Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8630absolute addresses) in the output file.
8631
8632@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8633@item CHIP @var{expression}
8634@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8635This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8636
8637@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8638@item END
8639This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8640
8641@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8642@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8643Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8644language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8645
8646@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8647@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8648Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8649@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8650
8651The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8652same line, with no change in its effect.
8653
8654@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8655@item LOAD @var{filename}
8656@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8657Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8658same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8659command line.
8660
8661@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8662@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8663@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8664MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8665option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8666
8667@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8668@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8669@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8670Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8671order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8672script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8673sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8674file, in the order specified.
8675
8676@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8677@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8678@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8679@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8680Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8681@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8682
8683@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8684@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8685@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8686@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8687You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8688specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8689If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8690@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8691@end table
8692
793c5807
NC
8693@node GNU Free Documentation License
8694@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8695@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8696
370b66a1
CD
8697@node LD Index
8698@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8699
8700@printindex cp
8701
8702@tex
7ca01ed9 8703% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8704% meantime:
8705\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8706\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8707\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8708\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8709\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8710\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8711\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8712\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8713\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8714% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8715@end tex
8716
252b5132 8717@bye
This page took 1.527601 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.